JP2020043942A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that is less likely to reduce interest during operation.SOLUTION: In a dimming/driving system 1500 of a game machine of the present invention, a logic unit 1530 generates a control signal from a CLK signal and a DATA signal to be transmitted, and a one-wire driver 1520 can operate a panel lighting device 347 and a panel driving device 348 on the basis of the control signal. In the game machine using such a system, compared with a conventional game machine, the number of components in a transmission path of the control signal can be reduced, the space required for the transmission path can be reduced, and the number of components can be reduced by being installed on components that are difficult to install in the conventional game machine. As a result, the possibility of failure is reduced, leading to a reduction in the game interruption time, thereby increasing interest of the game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 15

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Some conventional gaming machines include a converter that converts a control signal for controlling an LED or the like from a serial signal system to a parallel signal system so that a plurality of LEDs can be controlled. Reference 1).

JP-A-2017-143854

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the parallel signal method is used, the number of wirings is increased, and therefore, disconnection of the wiring is likely to occur. If the disconnection occurs during the operation of the gaming machine, the dimming of the LED cannot be performed, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine in which disconnection of wiring is less likely to occur and interest during operation is less likely to be reduced.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section show the correspondence with the embodiment described later in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application Example 1]
In the gaming machine (100) of the first application example of the present invention, the accessory (347, 348) controlled by a predetermined signal, the first signal (CLK signal (a)) for operating the accessory, and the second signal. Control means (320, 1530, 4450, 4630) capable of generating a third signal (signal (g)) from the signal (DATA signal (b)) and transmitting the third signal; Operating means (1520) for receiving the signal and operating the accessory based on the third signal.
[Application Example 2]
In the gaming machine (100) of the application example 2 of the present invention, the control means (300) capable of transmitting the first signal (CLK signal (a)) and the second signal (DATA signal (b)) includes: And a display device (125) for displaying predetermined game information by an LED, the display device comprising: a third signal (signal (g)) based on the first signal and the second signal from the control means; Is generated, and the predetermined game information is displayed by emitting or extinguishing the LED based on the third signal.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it can be set as the gaming machine with which the interest during operation hardly falls.

It is a front view of the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 100 showing a state in which the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened with respect to the outer frame 160. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating functional blocks of the gaming machine 100. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM 301b of the main control board 300. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for describing a main RAM 301c of the main control board 300. It is explanatory drawing which shows various determination tables etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit symbol determination table T2 and the distribution ratio of the big hit type. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 1st special 1 normal variation pattern table T4A. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic flow of a process executed by a main control board 300. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a preliminary determination process executed by a main CPU 301a of a main control board 300. It is a block diagram showing the details of effect control board 320. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a prior determination information storage area provided in a sub RAM 320c. It is an explanatory view showing a list of processing performed by effect control board 320. It is a flowchart of a prefetch process. It is a flowchart of an effect pattern determination process. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration of a dimming / driving system 1500 for controlling driving of the accessory of the gaming machine 100 and dimming the LED of the accessory. It is a block diagram showing the composition of logic part 1530 provided in production control board 320. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a timing chart of each signal in a logic unit 1530. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an external view and a terminal arrangement viewed from above when the one-wire driver 1520 is realized as an integrated circuit. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the function of each terminal in the one-wire driver 1520 in association with the symbol of each terminal. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an internal functional configuration of a one-wire driver 1520. FIG. 11 is a diagram comparing a conventional two-wire driver 1510 and a one-wire driver 1520 using a two-wire data signal of a clock signal and a data signal in synchronization with each other. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a format of data setting of each command input to the one-wire driver 1520. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating data contents set in each input mode of the one-wire driver 1520. FIG. 9 is a diagram for describing slave settings of a one-wire driver 1520. FIG. 25 is a diagram (continuation of FIG. 24-1) for describing the setting of the slave of the one-wire driver 1520. FIG. 14 is a diagram for describing setting of a sub-address of a one-wire driver 1520. FIG. 14 is a diagram for describing setting of data bytes of a one-wire driver 1520. FIG. 14 is a diagram for describing notes on data setting of a one-wire driver 1520. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in a signal when control data of the one-wire driver 1520 is input. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in a signal when control data of the one-wire driver 1520 is input. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in a signal when control data of the one-wire driver 1520 is input. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in a signal when control data of the one-wire driver 1520 is input. FIG. 9 is a diagram for describing power setting of a one-wire driver 1520. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a configuration in a case where one-wire drivers 1520 are cascaded. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a Vcc waveform at the time of a power-on reset of the one-wire driver 1520. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a change in Vcc when the ID setting operation of the one-wire driver 1520 is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the state transition at the time of using the VL terminal at the time of operation | movement of the one-wire driver 1520. It is a flowchart which shows the state transition at the time of not using the VL terminal at the time of operation | movement of the one-wire type driver 1520. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an absolute maximum rating of the one-wire driver 1520. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a package permissible loss characteristic of the one-wire driver 1520. 9 is a table for explaining operating conditions of the one-wire driver 1520. 10 is a table for explaining electrical characteristics of the one-wire driver 1520. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating electrical characteristics of a one-wire driver 1520. It is a figure showing the composition of light control / drive system 4300 in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing composition of light control / drive system 4400 in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of exclusive OR calculation processing performed by lamp CPU4450 in a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 18 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a dimming / driving system 4600 in a case where a plurality of one-wire drivers 1520 and a plurality of two-wire drivers 1510 are connected in multiple stages (cascade connection) according to a fourth embodiment. It is an external view which shows the mode of the general arrangement | positioning of the decoration unit of the periphery of a game area in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a configuration of a simplified logic circuit 4630 according to another embodiment. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 with the outer frame 10, the game board unit 12, and the inner frame 14 opened. It is a rear view of the game board unit 12. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the game board unit 12. FIG. 5A is a perspective view, FIG. 5B is a rear view, and FIG. 5C is a right side view of the assembly 2. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the assembly 2. FIG. 5 is a left side view illustrating a state where the board case 3 is assembled to the pedestal 20. 5A is a perspective view, FIG. 6B is a rear view, and FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 3. It is the (a) rear view and (b) front view of sealing body 4 which combined outer case 45 and inner case 40. FIG. 55 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line AA of FIG. 55 in the outer case 45 of the board case 1003 according to the modification in the direction of the arrow. FIG. 55 is a cross-sectional view in a direction indicated by arrows in a position corresponding to a line AA in FIG. 55 in an outer case 45 of a board case 1103 according to a modified example. FIG. 55 is a cross-sectional view of the outer case 45 of the board case 1203 according to the modification, taken along a line AA in FIG. 55, as viewed in the direction of the arrow. It is a rear view of the board case 1303 which concerns on a modification. 61 is a cross-sectional view of the outer case 45 of the board case 1303 as viewed in the direction of arrows BB in FIG. 61. FIG. It is a rear view of the board case 1551 concerning a modification. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 as viewed from an angle at which the seal portion 1561 overlaps a mounting portion of the ROM 502. It is a rear view of board case 1700 in which control board 1705 concerning an 8th embodiment was stored. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of a seal portion 1710, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of a date mark portion 1720. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of an opening prohibition seal portion 1730, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a state where the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is attached to a substrate case 1700. It is the schematic explaining the structure of the display of the information display 1750. It is a table for explaining the content displayed on the information display 1750 and the display form regarding the performance display of the gaming machine 1. 39 is a table for describing contents and display forms displayed on the information display 1750 with respect to the setting display of the gaming machine 1. (A) is a sectional view of an identification display portion 1791 of a board case 1790 according to a modification, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of an identification display portion 1796 of a board case 1795 according to a modification. It is a rear view of board case 1803 in which control board 501 concerning a 9th embodiment was stored. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the electronic component 595 is viewed from obliquely above via a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561. It is the (a) top view of transparent socket 1801, (b) side view. 66A is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 66A in the substrate case 1805 to 1808, and FIG. 66A is a sectional view taken along a line CC of FIG. 66A in the substrate cases 1809 and 1810, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a special position display section 541. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram of one method for reducing the light transmittance of a seal portion 1560. It is a typical back view of case part 1813 which stored prize ball board 1811. It is a typical rear view of the case part 1823 which accommodated the effect board 1821. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the assembly 2, in which a control substrate 501 is provided with a first area 1900 a and a second area 1900 b.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine 100 according to a first embodiment as an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate. The embodiments described below do not limit the present invention, and all the elements and combinations thereof described in the embodiments are not necessarily essential to the solution of the present invention. Absent.

(1st Embodiment)
[Configuration of gaming machine 100]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine frame of the gaming machine 100 showing a state in which the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened with respect to the outer frame 160. Note that the gaming machine 100 fires a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball wins a specific prize device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. Machine.

  In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as an “X direction” as necessary, and particularly, the right direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as a “+ X direction”, and the left direction of the gaming machine 100 is referred to as “−X direction”. Also called a direction. Further, the up-down direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as a “Y direction”, particularly, the upward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as a “+ Y direction”, and the downward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as a “−Y direction”. Further, the depth direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as “Z direction”, particularly, the direction toward the back side with respect to the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as “+ Z direction”, and the direction toward the front side with respect to the gaming machine 100 is “ -Z direction ".

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 160 attached to an island facility of a game arcade, and an inner frame 170 rotatably supported by the outer frame 160 in front of the outer frame 160. , And a glass frame 150 rotatably supported by the inner frame 170 at the front side of the inner frame 170. A glass member 151 is detachably provided on the glass frame 150 from the back side. At a predetermined position of the glass frame 150, a lock unit 190 is provided for opening and closing the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 with respect to the outer frame 160, and for attaching and detaching an upper unit 180 described later. . Further, at a predetermined position of the glass frame 150, a glass frame opening switch (not shown) for detecting that the glass frame 150 has been opened is provided, and at a predetermined position of the inner frame 170, the inner frame 170 is opened. An inner frame opening switch (not shown) for detecting that the operation has been performed is provided.

  The inner frame 170 is provided with a main mechanism constituting the gaming machine 100, various components, a board, and the like, and the game board unit 102 is detachably provided. A game area 106 is provided between the glass member 151 and the game board unit 102. The game area 106 includes a game ball flow-down area (not shown) in which game balls flow, and a display screen area of the main display device 131.

  The game board unit 102 includes a game board 102A made of a transparent acrylic member. A plurality of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) are arranged on the game board 102A. These nails and windmills have a function of changing the movement of the game ball or guiding the game ball to a predetermined winning opening. In the game board 102A, the surface on the player side is also referred to as the front surface, and the surface on the back side (the surface opposite to the front surface) is also referred to as the back surface.

  The game board 102A of the game board unit 102 has an opening 102AZ. The main display device 131 is disposed in the opening 102AZ. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the main display device 131.

  In the present embodiment, the game board 102A is formed transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game board 102A only needs to be formed to be light transmissive, and may be translucent. Further, the game board 102A may be formed of a member other than the acrylic member, for example, a transparent plastic member.

  On the lower side of the glass frame 150, a rendering operation unit BSU is provided. The production operation unit BSU includes a sword handle unit 135 and a production operation stick 136. An upper plate 128 is provided behind the effect operation unit BSU. A lower plate 129 is provided at the lower left of the effect operation unit BSU. Further, a firing handle device 103 is provided at the lower right of the effect operation unit BSU.

  In addition, an upper unit 180 is provided on the upper side of the glass frame 150, and when a predetermined game state is reached, the upper unit 180 performs a predetermined related operation (the upper unit 180 is an outer frame other than the glass frame 150). 160). Further, on both left and right sides of the glass frame 150, a first side display device 132 and a second side display device 133 for effect display during a game and during a non-game are provided.

  The upper plate 128 is a plate for storing game balls to be launched into the game area 106. The lower plate 129 is a plate for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 128. The game balls stored in the upper plate 128 are led out to a firing rail (not shown), guided by a firing handle device 103 to a guide rail (not shown) at a predetermined firing intensity via the firing rail, and played. It is fired at the area 106 (game ball falling area). In this case, depending on the degree of rotation of the firing handle device 103 by the player, the game ball fired from the firing handle device 103 passes through the left route 4706a or the right route 4706b of the game ball flow-down region included in the game region 106. I do. Specifically, when the player rotationally operates the firing handle device 103 relatively weakly, a game ball fired from the firing handle device 103 can pass through the left route 4706a. On the other hand, when the player rotates the firing handle device 103 relatively strongly, the game ball fired from the firing handle device 103 can pass through the right route 4706b.

  A sword handle unit 135 is arranged at the center of the effect operation unit BSU. The sword handle unit 135 can change the effect mode by a pressing operation. Further, on the left side of the effect operation unit BSU, an effect operation stick 136 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming area 106 includes a sword unit 154 on the upper back side, a first character unit 155a on the front side (front side) of the sword unit 154 on the upper left side of the game ball flowing down area, and a game. The second character unit 155b is located on the lower right side of the ball falling area, the first moonlight unit 156 is located on the left side of the gaming ball falling area, the second moonlight unit 157 is located on the right side of the gaming ball falling area, and the front side of the gaming area 106 ( A first light guide panel 181a that covers the game area 106 (on the front side) and a second light guide panel 181b that covers the front side (front side) of each of the units 154, 155a, 155b, 156, and 157 behind the game area 106. , Respectively.

  Each unit 154, 155a, 155b, 156, 157 provided in the game area 106 is a movable character (so-called gimmick), and the units 154, 155a, 155b, 156, 157 Various effects are performed by moving the camera in a predetermined operation in accordance with the motion. The first light guide panel 181a and the second light guide panel 181b are made of a transparent resin such as acrylic resin. The first light guide panel 181a and the second light guide panel 181b allow the effect display displayed on the main display device 131 to be visible and visible. A pattern or the like can be displayed by causing a part of the panel to emit light by light incident from a unit (not shown).

  In the present application, “movable character” is interpreted to mean a moving character. In addition, the “accessory” is broadly interpreted to include both movable and non-movable fixed-acting objects.

  In a region substantially below the center of the game region 106, a first starter 112 having a start region in which game balls can enter is provided. The first starting device 112 is a general prize device type prize device. When a game ball wins, a jackpot random number is acquired, a jackpot determination is performed, and a predetermined prize ball (for example, three) is paid out. . In addition, above the first starting device 112, the game ball does not pass between the nails, mainly in the middle of the left side route 4706 a of the game ball flow-down region, so-called warp, and enters the first starting device 112. A stage 140 is provided to facilitate the operation.

  Further, a second starting device 115 having a starting region in which a game ball can enter is provided in a lower right region of the game region 106. The second starting device 115 is a so-called attacker-type electric accessory, in which a starting port is provided at a lower portion, and a movable piece 115b is provided above the starting port, and the movable piece 115b is a game board. It is movably controlled to a protruding state protruding from 102A and a retracted state of being drawn into game board 102A. When the movable piece 115b is in the retracted state, the game ball is guided from the starting port into the second starting device 115, and the game ball can easily enter the second starting device 115. Conversely, when the movable piece 115b projects, the game ball does not enter the starting port, and the game ball cannot enter the second starting device 115. That is, when the movable piece 115b is in the protruding state, the second starting device 115 has no opportunity for winning a game ball, and when the movable piece 115b is in the retracted state, the opportunity for winning a game ball increases.

  When the game ball wins, the second starting device 115 obtains a jackpot random number and performs a jackpot determination in the same manner as the first starting device 112, and, for example, the same prize balls (three) as the first starting device 112. Will be paid out.

  Also, in the area on the right side of the game area 106, a normal symbol operation gate 113b having a normal area through which a game ball can pass, a first large prize winning device 117 into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball into which a game ball can enter And a second large winning device 127. When the game ball passes, the normal symbol operation gate 113b acquires a winning random number and performs a winning determination. It should be noted that even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 113b, no prize ball is paid out based on the passage.

  The first big winning device 117 is a so-called attacker-type electric accessory, which has an opening at a lower portion thereof and has a movable piece 117b above the opening, and this movable piece 117b It is movably controlled to a protruding state protruding from the board 102A and a retracted state of being drawn into the game board 102A. Then, when the movable piece 117b is in the retracted state, the game ball is guided from the opening into the first big winning device 117, and the game ball can be won in the first big winning device 117 (this state is "open" or "open"). State)). When a game ball wins in the first big winning device 117, a predetermined prize ball (for example, 15 balls) is paid out. Conversely, when the movable piece 117b is in the protruding state, the game ball does not enter the opening, and the game ball cannot enter the first big winning device 117 (this state is also referred to as "closed" or "closed state"). ).

  The second big prize winning device 127 is a so-called attacker-type electric accessory, in which an opening is provided at a lower portion, and a movable piece 127b is provided above the opening, and the movable piece 127b is a game. It is movably controlled to a protruding state protruding from the board 102A and a retracted state of being drawn into the game board 102A. Then, when the movable piece 127b is in the retracted state, the game ball is guided from the opening into the second big winning device 127, and the game ball can be won in the second big winning device 127 (this state is "open" or "open"). State)). When a game ball wins in the second big winning device 127, a predetermined prize ball (for example, 15 balls) is paid out. Conversely, when the movable piece 127b is in the protruding state, the game ball does not enter the opening, and the game ball cannot enter the second big winning device 127 (this state is also referred to as "closed" or "closed state"). ).

  In addition, a winning assistance device 200 is provided above the second big winning device 127. The prize assisting device 200 is configured such that when a plurality of game balls that have passed the right route 4706b of the game area 106 pass through the movable piece 127b in the closed state, they stay on the movable piece 127b for a predetermined time. The movable piece 127b is opened at predetermined time intervals, and a plurality of staying game balls are allowed to enter the second big winning device 127 at a time, thereby improving the interest for the player. .

  At the bottom of the game area 106, game balls that have not entered any of the first starting device 112, the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, and the second big winning device 127 are discharged. Out port 111 is provided. Further, a cover 116 that covers the gate 113b, the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, and the second big winning device 127 from the near side is provided in a region on the right side of the gaming region 106. The cover 116 is formed with a guide portion projecting toward the game board 102A in order to guide the game balls to the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, and the second big winning device 127.

  A main display device 131 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) or the like is provided at a substantially central portion of the game area 106. The main display device 131 displays an image during standby when no game is performed. Or display an image according to the progress of the game. Above all, based on the winning of the game balls of the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115, a plurality of decorative symbols for notifying the jackpot determination result are variably displayed, and a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, 777 etc.) is stopped and the fixed stop is displayed, whereby the big hit is notified as a big hit determination result.

  That is, when a game ball wins in the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115, the decorative symbol changes in a special symbol displayed on a first special symbol display 120 and a second special symbol display 122 described later. The display is changed and displayed in accordance with the display, and is stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol after a predetermined change time elapses. That is, the timing of the variation display of the decorative symbol by the main display device 131 and the timing of the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 120 and the second special symbol display 122 are synchronized. In addition, during the variable display of the decorative symbols, various images, characters, and the like may be rendered and displayed, or by displaying a look-ahead rendering of a reserved display related to the special symbol, a jackpot may be won. It gives the player the feeling of expectation.

  In the present embodiment, the main display device 131 is used as a liquid crystal display device. However, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or a projector, a so-called 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a rotating drum, or the like may be used. A display device may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a display 125 is provided on the lower left side of the game area 106. The display 125 includes a normal symbol display 118, a first special symbol display 120, a second special symbol display 122, a normal symbol hold display 119, a first special symbol hold display 123, and a second special symbol display 123. And a special symbol hold display 124. The details of the display 125 will be described later.

  The main display device 131 is disposed substantially at the center of the game board unit 102, and three decorative symbols are variably displayed, and various effects are displayed. The effect displayed on the main display device 131 is executed based on an effect pattern described later. Hereinafter, the effect displayed on the main display device 131 is also simply referred to as “display effect”. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbols include numerals 1 to 9 and special symbols.

  In the display effect on the main display device 131, in the case of winning in the jackpot determination described later, that is, in the case of the jackpot, finally, three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and a jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot (for example, “ 7, 7, 7 "). In addition, in the display effect, in the case of a loss in the jackpot determination described later, that is, in the case of a loss, finally, three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and a loss symbol array (for example, “2,5 , 1 ”etc.). Thereby, the player can recognize the result of the jackpot determination.

  When the player makes a so-called "left hit" while maintaining the state where the firing handle device 103 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is hit with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 106. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called “right hit” while maintaining the state where the firing handle device 103 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is hit with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right area in the game area 106. Therefore, when the ball is entered into the gate 113b, the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117 or the second big winning device 127, "right hit" is required.

The first starting device 112 is a starting device that is always open. On the other hand, the second starting device 115 is normally closed by the movable piece 115b. The movable piece 115b opens the second starting device 115 based on the determination result on the condition that a game ball enters the gate 113b. In this case, a state is created in which a game ball can easily enter. When a game ball enters the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are obtained, and the following four determinations are made. Can be performed.
(1) Determination as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player (hereinafter, also referred to as a jackpot determination).
(2) The display 125 determines a symbol (hereinafter also referred to as a special symbol) for notifying the result of the jackpot determination (hereinafter, also referred to as a jackpot symbol determination).
(3) In the jackpot determination symbol determination, in the case of a jackpot, a symbol representing the type of the jackpot (hereinafter, also referred to as a jackpot symbol) is determined.
(4) In a display effect on the main display device 131, it is determined whether or not to perform a reach (hereinafter, also referred to as a reach determination). This is also referred to as fluctuation pattern determination.)

  Here, the "big hit game" is a special game for opening the first big winning device 117 or the second big winning device 127. Also, “reach” means that, of the three decorative symbols that are displayed in a variable manner, two decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the main display device 131, and the two decorative symbols are three decorative symbols that constitute a jackpot symbol array. Means a state where two of them are configured. For example, in the main display device 131, two decorative symbols out of the three decorative symbols to be variably displayed are stopped and displayed, and the two decorative symbols are in the same state. In this case, the decorative symbols that form two of the three decorative symbols that make up the jackpot symbol array are also referred to as reach symbols.

  In the following description, the above four determinations executed on condition that a game ball passed through the first starting device 112 is won are also referred to as “first special symbol determination”, and the game ball is sent to the second starting device 115. The above four determinations executed on condition of winning are also referred to as “second special symbol determination”, and these determinations are collectively referred to as “special symbol determination”.

  When the game ball has passed through the gate 113b, a normal symbol random number is acquired, and it is determined whether or not to release the movable piece 115b of the second starting device 115. Hereinafter, the determination performed on condition that the game ball passes through the gate 113b is also referred to as “ordinary symbol determination”. In the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol determination, that is, the probability of determining that the movable piece 115b is to be opened, is a specification that changes depending on the gaming state of the gaming machine 100.

  In the first big winning device 117, the movable piece 117b is opened according to the result of the big hit symbol determination. The first big winning device 117 is normally closed by the movable piece 117b. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, a big hit game in which the movable piece 117b is operated to open the first big winning device 117 is executed. For this reason, the player can obtain more prize balls by performing “right hit” during the jackpot game as compared to when the jackpot game is not performed.

[Description of Display 125]
The display 125 shown in FIG. 1 mainly displays information related to jackpot symbol determination and ordinary symbol determination, and includes a first special symbol display 120, a second special symbol display 122, a first special symbol hold display 123, and a It has a 2 special symbol hold display 124, a normal symbol display 118, and a normal symbol hold display 119.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 120 changes and displays the special symbol, then stops and displays the special symbol, and determines the big hit symbol determination in the first special symbol determination based on the stopped special symbol. Report results. On the first special symbol display 120, a jackpot symbol indicating a jackpot or a lost symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a loss is displayed as a determination result of the jackpot symbol determination. You.

  When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 122 changes and displays the special symbol and then stops and displays the special symbol, and determines the big hit symbol determination in the second special symbol determination based on the stopped special symbol. Report results. On the second special symbol display 122, a jackpot symbol indicating a big hit or a lost symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a loss is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol determination result. .

  By the way, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when a new game ball is awarded to the first starting device 112, such as during a change display of a special symbol related to a special symbol determination or during a jackpot game, a game triggered by the winning. (1) Special symbol determination and symbol variation display are not executed immediately. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 has a holding function of holding the first special symbol determination and storing four pieces of random number information for the first special symbol determination as a set of holding information. The first special symbol hold display 123 displays the number of the hold information for the first special symbol determination stored in this way.

  Similarly, when a gaming ball newly wins in the second starting device 115, such as during a special symbol change display or a jackpot game, the second special symbol triggered by the winning is displayed. The judgment and the change display of the symbol are not executed immediately. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 has a holding function of holding the second special symbol determination and storing four pieces of random number information for the second special symbol determination as a set of holding information. The second special symbol holding display 124 displays the number of pieces of holding information thus stored for the second special symbol determination.

  When the ordinary symbol determination is performed, the ordinary symbol display 118 displays the ordinary symbol in a fluctuating manner, and then stops the display, and notifies the determination result of the ordinary symbol determination by the stopped and displayed ordinary symbol. By the way, even when the game ball passes through the gate 113b, such as during the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 118, the normal symbol determination and the normal symbol variation display related to the normal symbol determination are not immediately executed. . Therefore, the gaming machine 100 has a suspending function of suspending the ordinary symbol determination and storing information of the ordinary symbol random number for the ordinary symbol determination as the held information. The normal symbol hold display 119 displays the number of pieces of hold information for normal symbol determination stored as described above.

  Note that the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment includes a right-handed ramp (not shown) and a round ramp (not shown). The right-handed lamp is lit in a jackpot game state described later and in a time-saving game state described later, and it is recommended that the player make a right-handed (detailed later). A round lamp is composed of one or more lamps. At the time of the big hit, the round lamp shifts from the extinguished state to the lit state. The round lamp indicates the number of round games according to the jackpot type at the time of jackpot by lighting. For example, when there are two round lamps, one of the round lamps lights to indicate that the round game is executed four times (that is, a 4R jackpot is suggested) and the other round lamp is used. The light of indicates that the round game is executed 16 times (that is, it indicates that it is a 16R jackpot).

[Internal Configuration of Gaming Machine 100]
FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating functional blocks of gaming machine 100. The gaming machine 100 includes a main control board 300, a payout control board 310, an effect control board 320, an image control board 330, a lamp control board 340, a launch control board 350, and a power supply board 360.

  The main control board 300 controls the basic operation of the gaming machine. The main control board 300 has a one-chip microcomputer 301. The one-chip microcomputer 301 includes a main CPU 301a, a main ROM 301b, and a main RAM 301c. The main control board 300 has an input port and an output port (both not shown) for main control.

  The main control input port includes a gate detection switch 303 for detecting that a game ball has entered the gate 113b, and a first starting device detection switch for detecting that a game ball has entered the first starting device 112. 304, a second starting device detecting switch 305 for detecting that a game ball has entered the second starting device 115, and a first prize device detecting switch 306a for detecting that a gaming ball has entered the first big winning device 117. , A second winning device detection switch 306b for detecting that a game ball has entered the second big winning device 127, and a payout control board 310 are connected. Various signals are input to the main control board 300 through the main control input port.

  The output port for main control includes a starting device opening / closing solenoid 307 for opening / closing the movable piece 115b, a first big prize device opening / closing solenoid 308 for operating the movable piece 117b for opening / closing the first big winning device 117, and a second A second big prize device opening / closing solenoid 370 for operating the movable piece 127b for opening and closing the big prize device 127, a symbol display 118, 120, 122 for displaying a special symbol and a normal symbol on the display 125, and holding for special symbol determination. A symbol hold display 119, 123, 124 for displaying the number of information and the number of hold information for normal symbol determination, a game information output terminal board 309 for outputting an external information signal, a payout control board 310, and an effect control board 320 It is connected. Various signals are output from the main control output port.

  Note that the game information output terminal board 309 is a board for outputting an external information signal generated in the main control board 300 to a hall computer or the like of a game store. The game information output terminal board 309 is wired and connected to the main control board 300, and the game information output terminal board 309 is provided with a connector for connecting to a hall computer or the like of a game store.

  In the one-chip microcomputer 301 of the main control board 300, the main CPU 301a reads out a program stored in the main ROM 301b and performs arithmetic processing based on an input signal from each detection switch and a timer, and directly controls each device. Alternatively, a command is transmitted to another board according to the result of the arithmetic processing.

  FIG. 4-1 is a diagram for explaining the main ROM 301b of the main control board 300. FIG. 4-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the main RAM 301c of the main control board 300. In particular, FIG. 4-1 is a diagram for explaining storage information stored in the main ROM 301b, and FIG. 4-2 is a diagram for explaining the main RAM 301c.

  The main ROM 301b stores a game control program and tables necessary for various games. For example, in the main ROM 301b, as shown in FIG. 4A, a large hit determination table T1, a big hit symbol determination table T2, a reach determination table T3, a first variation pattern table T4, a second variation pattern table T5, , An ordinary symbol determination table T6.

  The jackpot determination table T1 is a table for performing a jackpot determination based on a jackpot random number. The big hit determination table T1 includes two big hit determination tables, that is, a non-probable change big hit determination table T1A and a positive change big hit determination table T1B.

  The big hit symbol determination table T2 is a table for performing a big hit symbol determination based on a big hit symbol random number. The big hit symbol determination table T2 includes two big hit symbol determination tables, that is, a special one big hit symbol determination table T2A and a special two big hit symbol determination table T2B.

  The reach determination table T3 is a table for performing the reach determination based on the reach determination random number. The reach determination table T3 includes four reach determination tables (not shown), that is, a special 1 normal state reach determination table, a special 1 probability change reach determination table, a special 2 normal state reach determination table, and a special 2 probability change table. A reach determination table. These four reach determination tables are selected depending on the game state and the type of the special symbol. Specifically, the special 1 normal time reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the reach in the display effect based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the non-probable changing game state. The special probability change reach table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the reach in the display effect based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the probability change game state. The special-time 2 reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the reach in the display effect based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the non-probable change game state. The special probability change time reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the reach using the decorative symbol in the display effect based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the probability change game state. Note that details of various game states such as the non-probable game state and the probable game state will be described later.

  The first variation pattern table T4 is a table for performing a variation pattern determination based on a variation pattern random number. The first variation pattern table T4 includes four variation pattern tables, that is, a first variation 1 normal variation pattern table T4A, a first variation 1 certain variation variation table T4B, and a first variation 2 normal variation pattern table T4C. And a first extraordinary variation probability variation table T4D. These four variation pattern tables can be selected according to the game state and the type of the special symbol. Specifically, the first special first normal variation pattern table T4A is a table for selecting a variation pattern of a first special symbol based on a ball entering the first starting device 112 in a non-probable variation game state. The first special first-variation-variation variation pattern table T4B is a table for selecting a variation pattern of a first special symbol based on a ball entering the first starting device 112 in the probable variation game state. The first special 2 normal-time variation pattern table T4C is a table for selecting a variation pattern of a second special symbol based on a ball entering the second starting device 115 in the non-probable variation game state. The first special second-variation-variation-variation pattern table T4D is a table for selecting a variation pattern of a second special symbol based on a ball entering the second starting device 115 in the probable variation game state.

  The second variation pattern table T5 is a table for performing a variation pattern determination based on a variation pattern random number. The second variation pattern table T5 includes four variation pattern tables: a second variation 1 normal variation pattern table T5A, a second variation 1 certain variation variation pattern table T5B, and a second variation 2 normal variation pattern table T5C. And a second extraordinary variable probability variation pattern table T5D. These four variation pattern tables can be selected according to the game state and the type of the special symbol. Specifically, the second special 1 normal variation pattern table T5A is a table for selecting a variation pattern of a first special symbol based on a ball entering the first starting device 112 in a non-probable variation game state. The second special first probability variation time variation table T5B is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol based on a ball entering the first starting device 112 in the probability variation game state. The second special 2 normal time fluctuation pattern table T5C is a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern of a second special symbol based on a ball entering the second starting device 115 in a non-probable variable game state. The second extraordinary variation time variation pattern table T5D is a table for selecting a variation pattern of a second special symbol based on a ball entering the second starting device 115 in the probability variation game state.

  Any one of the first variation pattern table T4 and the second variation pattern table T5 is selected at the time of determining the variation pattern, and is not selected at the same time. The first variation pattern table T4 is a table in which the average variation seconds (average production time) is shorter than the second variation pattern table T5, and when the after-acquisition hold order information described later is “3” or “4”. Is selected. The second variation pattern table T5 is a table in which the average variation seconds is longer than the first variation pattern table T4, and is selected when the later-described acquisition suspension order information is “1” or “2”. Details of these will be described later.

  The ordinary symbol determination table T6 is a table for performing an ordinary symbol determination based on an ordinary symbol random number. Details of the above-mentioned big hit determination table T1, big hit symbol determination table T2, first variation pattern table T4, second variation pattern table T5, and ordinary symbol determination table T6 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4-2 (A), the main RAM 301c functions as a work area for data during the arithmetic processing of the main CPU 301a, and has a plurality of storage areas. For example, the main RAM 301c has a hold information storage area 301cx, a hold information determination area 301cy, and an acquired payout equivalent information storage area 301cz. The main RAM 301c has a storage area (not shown) in which various flags (such as a probable change game flag, a time saving game flag, and a jackpot game flag, which will be described later) and various recorded values (variables K and constants Km, which will be described later) are stored. Z).

  As shown in FIG. 4-2 (B), the hold information storage area 301cx includes four hold information areas (first and second hold information areas) in which the hold information related to the first starting device 112 and the hold order information at the time of acquisition can be stored in association. 1 hold information area, second hold information area, third hold information area, and fourth hold information area), and four hold information areas (first hold information area, A second hold information area, a third hold information area, and a fourth hold information area).

  In the hold information area corresponding to the first special symbol in the hold information storage area 301cx, the priority of storage of the hold information is such that the first hold information area has the highest priority and the hold information is stored in the first hold information area. If it is stored, then the second pending information area is prioritized as a storage target, then the third pending information area is prioritized as a storage target, and finally, the fourth pending information area is stored as a storage target. Selected. The same applies to the hold information area corresponding to the second special symbol. In FIG. 4-2 (B), “○” is shown in the hold information area where the hold information is stored, and “−” is shown in the hold information area where the hold information is not stored. It is shown.

  The acquisition-time suspension order information stored in the suspension information area of the suspension information storage area 301cx is information indicating the suspension order when the suspension information was acquired. More specifically, the acquisition suspension order information corresponds to the number of the suspension information area stored at that time when the suspension information is acquired. For example, when the hold information is acquired and the hold information is stored only in the first hold information area, the hold information is stored in the second hold information area. The information is “2”. When the hold information is acquired, if the hold information is stored in the first hold information area, the second hold information area, and the third hold information area, the hold information is stored in the fourth hold information area. Since the information is stored, the acquisition-time pending order information is “4”. The suspension information determination area 301cy is a determination area in which a special symbol determination is performed based on the suspension information.

  The acquired payout equivalent information storage area 301cz is information for storing acquired payout equivalent information. The acquired payout equivalent information indicates the number of game balls paid out to the player based on winning in the first big winning device 117 and the second big winning device 127 in the big hit gaming state. The number represented by the acquired payout equivalent information stored in the acquired payout equivalent information storage area 301cz (also referred to as the acquired payout equivalent number) is such that one gaming ball is stored in the first large winning device 117 and the second large winning device 127. Upon entry, the number of prize balls (for example, 15 in the first big winning device 117 and 10 in the second big winning device 127) is added. That is, the number represented by the acquired payout ball equivalent information is a value obtained by multiplying the number of game balls entering the first big winning device 117 and the second big winning device 127 by the number of prize balls in the jackpot gaming state.

  Note that the acquired payout equivalent information stored in the acquired payout equivalent information storage area 301cz is reset (erased) by the main CPU 301a when the time-saving gaming state ends. Therefore, the number represented by the acquired payout equivalent information is the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state at the time of the first jackpot, and the case where the game is shifted to the jackpot game state again before the time-saving game state after the first jackpot ends Is the sum of the number of game balls paid out. In other words, the acquired payout number corresponding to the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state is added each time the jackpot gaming state is entered, while the time-saving gaming state continues.

  The main RAM 301c has a backup area 301cp in addition to a memory for temporarily storing various data. The backup area 301cp stores the value of the stack pointer and various data at the time of power shutdown (including power shutdown by operating the power switch 122; the same applies hereinafter) when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When power is turned off (including power-on by operating the power switch 122. The same applies hereinafter), the state of the gaming machine 100 can return to the state before power-off based on the information in the backup area 301cp. It has become. The writing to the backup area 301cp is executed when the power is turned off by the power restoration process, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 301cp is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

  The payout control board 310 controls the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls. The payout control board 310 includes a one-chip microcomputer including a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown), and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication. The payout CPU reads out a program stored in a payout ROM based on an input signal from a payout ball measurement switch 311, a door open switch 312, and a timer for detecting whether or not a game ball has been paid out, and performs an arithmetic processing. And transmits corresponding data to the main control board 300 based on the processing. On the output side of the payout control board 310, a payout motor 313 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from a storage section of game balls to a player is connected. The payout CPU reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 300, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 313 of the prize ball payout device to execute a predetermined prize. Dispense the ball to the player. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a work area for data during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU.

  The effect control board 320 mainly controls each effect such as during a game or on standby. The effect control board 320 includes a sub-CPU 320a, a sub-ROM 320b, and a sub-RAM 320c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 300 to the effect control board 320. . The sub CPU 320a reads the program stored in the sub ROM 320b based on various commands received from the main control board 300, various units, the staging operation stick 136, and an input signal from the timer, and performs arithmetic processing. Based on the processing, corresponding data is transmitted to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340.

  For example, when the sub CPU 320a in the effect control board 320 receives the change start command from the main control board 300, the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the sword handle unit 135, the sword unit 154, the first character unit 155a, the second character unit 155a. An effect pattern for causing the character unit 155b, the first moonlight unit 156, the second moonlight unit 157, and the like to execute a game effect is determined, and an effect pattern designation command for executing the effect pattern is transmitted to the image control board 330 or the lamp control. Transmit to substrate 340. Details of the determination of the effect pattern will be described later.

  The sub-ROM 320b stores an effect control program, data necessary for determining various games, and a plurality of tables. Details of these tables will be described later.

  The sub RAM 320c functions as a work area for data at the time of the arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 320a, and stores a game state, an effect pattern, a decorative pattern, a count counter, firing operation information, and the like. Further, a plurality of storage areas are provided in the sub RAM 320c. Details of these storage areas will be described later.

  The image control board 330 includes an image CPU (not shown), a control ROM, a control RAM, a CGROM, a VRAM, and a VDP (not shown) for performing image display control of the main display device 131, an audio CPU, an audio ROM, and an audio RAM. . The image control board 330 is connected to the effect control board 320 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and the output side thereof is connected to the main display device 131 and the audio output device 331.

  The image CPU controls the VDP to display a predetermined image based on the command received from the effect control board 320. The control RAM functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the image CPU, and temporarily stores data read from the control ROM. The control ROM stores a program for control processing of the image CPU, an animation pattern for displaying an animation based on the effect pattern, animation scene information, and the like.

  The CGROM stores a large number of image data such as decorative designs and backgrounds displayed on the main display device 131. The image CPU executes a predetermined program based on the effect pattern designation command transmitted from the effect control board 320. At the same time, control is performed so that predetermined image data stored in the CGROM is expanded in the VRAM, and the image data expanded in the VRAM is displayed on the main display device 131, thereby realizing a display effect.

  The audio ROM stores a large number of audio data to be output from the audio output device 331, and the audio CPU reads out a predetermined program based on the effect pattern designation command transmitted from the effect control board 320. At the same time, audio output control is performed in the audio output device 331 to realize an audio effect.

  The lamp control board 340 includes a firing handle device 103 provided on the glass frame 150, a frame lighting device 345 such as an LED built in the sword handle unit 135 and the upper unit 180, and a sword unit provided on the game board unit 102. 154, the first character unit 155a, the second character unit 155b, the first moonlight unit 156 and the second moonlight unit 157, a lighting effect by lighting or blinking a panel lighting device 347 such as an LED incorporated therein. To achieve. Further, the lamp control board 340 includes a frame driving device 346 such as a motor for driving the firing handle device 103, the sword handle unit 135 and the upper unit 180, a sword unit 154, a first character unit 155a, and a second character unit. 155b, the board driving device 348 such as a motor for driving the first moonlight unit 156 and the second moonlight unit 157 is controlled to realize a movable effect.

  The launch control board 350 receives a touch signal from the touch sensor 351 and controls energization of the launch solenoid 353 and the ball feed solenoid 354 based on the voltage supplied from the launch volume 352.

  The touch sensor 351 is configured by a capacitance type proximity switch using a change in capacitance caused by a player touching the firing handle device 103, and when detecting that the player has touched the firing handle device 103, And outputs a touch signal to the firing control board 350 to permit the firing solenoid 353 to be energized.

  The firing volume 352 is constituted by a variable resistor, and a constant voltage (for example, 5 V) applied to the firing volume 352 is divided by a variable resistor, and the divided voltage is supplied to the firing control board 350.

  Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 353 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 350. As a result, the number of game balls fired per minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) because one shot ball is fired each time the firing solenoid makes one revolution. That is, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.

  The touch signal from the touch sensor 351 and the voltage signal from the firing volume 352 are input to the effect control board 320. Thereby, the launch of the game ball can be detected on the effect control board 320.

  The power supply board 360 includes a backup power supply 360a (hereinafter, also referred to as a backup capacitor 360a) composed of a capacitor, and supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 100. Specifically, a wire 360b is connected to the main control board 300 via a wire 360b, a payout control board 310 is connected via a wire 360c, an effect control board 320 is connected via a wire 360d, and a firing control board 350 is connected to the wire 360e. Supply power supply voltage via Further, the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 100 is monitored, and when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value, a power interruption detection signal is output to the main control board 300. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal goes high, the main CPU 301a becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal goes low, the main CPU 301a enters an operation stop state. The backup power source 360a is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery.

[Explanation of game state]
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing various determination tables and the like. Specifically, FIG. 5 (A) shows the non-probable-change big-hit determination table T1A, FIG. 5 (B) shows the positive-change big-hit determination table T1B, and FIG. 5 (C) shows the ordinary symbol determination table T6. Is shown.

  In the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the gaming state related to the jackpot determination may be set to “non-probable gaming state” or “probable gaming state”. In the gaming machine 100, the non-time-saving gaming state or the "time-saving gaming state" can be set as the gaming state related to the normal symbol determination. Hereinafter, these game states will be described.

[Explanation of non-probable game state and probable game state]
In the jackpot determination in the non-probable variable gaming state, the non-probable variable jackpot determination table T1A shown in FIG. 5A is used. In the non-probable change jackpot determination table T1A, the jackpot value determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination is set to three numerical values of “0” to “2”. In the jackpot determination using the non-probable change jackpot determination table T1A, a jackpot random number (any numerical value from “0” to “1199”) obtained when the ball is entered into the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115 is calculated. If any of the above three jackpot values, it is determined to be "big hit", and if not, it is determined to be "losing". That is, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination in the non-probable changing game state (also referred to as a big hit probability) is 1/400.

  In the jackpot determination in the probable change state, a probable change jackpot determination table T1B shown in FIG. 5B is used. In the probability-change big hit determination table T1B, the big hit value determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination is set to 20 numerical values from “0” to “19”. In the jackpot determination using the probability-change jackpot determination table T1B, the jackpot random number (one of “0” to “1199”) obtained when the ball enters the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115 is If any of the above 20 jackpot values, it is determined as "big hit", and if not, it is determined as "losing". In other words, the jackpot probability in the case of the probability change game state is 1/60.

  Therefore, the probability-change game state is set to have a higher jackpot probability in the jackpot determination than the non-probability change game state, and is a game state more advantageous to the player than the non-probability change game state. In the case of the probable variable game state, the probable game flag is set to "ON", and in the case of the non-probable game state, the probable game flag is set to "OFF". The transition from the non-probable variable game state to the probable variable game state or the transition from the probable variable game state to the non-probable variable game state can be performed after the end of the big hit game.

[Explanation of non-time saving game state and time saving game state]
As shown in FIG. 5 (C), in the ordinary symbol determination table T6, in the ordinary symbol determination in the non-time-saving game state, the winning value determined to be a hit is set to only “0”, and the ordinary symbol determination in the time-saving gaming state is performed. In, the hit value determined to be a hit is set to 65535 pieces from “0” to “65534”.

  In the normal symbol determination in the non-time saving game state, the normal symbol random number (any numerical value from “0” to “65535”) obtained when the game ball passes through the gate 113b is the only one hit value “0”. Is determined as "hit", and if not "0", it is determined as "losing". That is, the probability of being determined as a hit in the normal symbol determination in the non-time-saving gaming state is 1/65536.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol determination in the time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol random number (any value from “0” to “65535”) acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 113b is set to one of the 65535 hit values. Is determined as "hit", and if neither is found, it is determined as "losing". That is, the probability of being determined as a hit in the ordinary symbol determination in the non-time-saving game state is 65535/65536 ≒ 1 / 1.00002.

  Further, in the non-time saving game state, after the determination of the ordinary symbol determination is performed on condition that the game ball has passed the gate 113b, the variation time from the start of the variation of the ordinary symbol to the stop display is 12 seconds. It is set relatively long, and the opening control time for opening the second starting device 115 by moving the movable piece 115b when winning is won is set relatively short at 0.2 seconds. That is, in the non-time saving game state, when a game ball passes through the gate 113b, a normal symbol determination is performed, and a normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 118, and the variable symbol is displayed in a variable display. Is stopped and displayed 12 seconds after the start of. If the determination result is a hit, the second starting device 115 is opened for 0.2 seconds by the movement of the movable piece 115b after the stop display of the ordinary symbol.

  On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, after performing the normal symbol determination performed on condition that the game ball passes through the gate 113b, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol to the stop display is 3 hours. And the opening control time for opening the second starting device 115 by moving the movable piece 115b when winning is won is set to be relatively long as 2.5 seconds. That is, in the time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the gate 113b, a normal symbol determination is performed, and the normal symbol display device 118 performs a variable display of the normal symbol, and the variable symbol is displayed with a variable display. Stop display 3 seconds after starting. If the determination result is a hit, the second starting device 115 is opened for 2.5 seconds by the movement of the movable piece 115b after the stop display of the ordinary symbol.

  As described above, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low value of 1/65536, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively long time of 12 seconds. The opening control time of 115b is set relatively short at 0.2 seconds. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol determination is set relatively high at 65535/65536, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set relatively short at 3 seconds, and the movable piece 115b is opened. The control time is set relatively long at 2.5 seconds.

  Therefore, when the same number of game balls pass through the gate 113b, the second starting device 115 is more easily controlled to be in the open state in the time saving game state than in the non-time saving game state. Thus, in the time-saving game state, the consumption of the game ball in the progress of the game is suppressed, and the player can proceed with the game more advantageously than in the non-time-saving game state. In the time saving game state, the time saving game flag is set to “ON”, and in the non-time saving game state, the time saving game flag is “OFF”. The transition from the non-time-saving gaming state to the time-saving gaming state, or the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, can be executed after the end of the big hit game.

  In the time-saving game state of the above embodiment, compared to the non-time-saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol determination is high, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is short, and the opening control time of the movable piece 115b is set long, Although the consumption of the game ball is suppressed in the progress of the game, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the time saving game state, at least one of the winning probability of the ordinary symbol determination, the variation time of the ordinary symbol, and the opening control time of the movable piece 115b, compared to the non-time saving gaming state, suppresses the consumption of the game ball. May be set to be performed. For example, in the time saving game state, in order to suppress the consumption of the game ball, it may be set so that only the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving game state.

Hereinafter, the game state that is the non-probable change game state and the non-time saving game state is also referred to as a normal game state. A game state that is a non-probable change game state and a time-saving game state is also called a low-probability time-saving game state. A game state that is a probable change game state and a non-time saving game state is also referred to as a highly accurate non-time saving game state. The game state that is the certainty-variable game state and the time-saving game state is also referred to as a high-precision time-saving game state (hidden game state).
Further, the time-saving gaming state can be continuously performed for a predetermined number of times of change. The number of fluctuations in which the time-saving gaming state is performed in this way is also referred to as the number of time-saving fluctuations.

[Description of jackpot games]
The big hit game is executed when the big hit game flag is ON, and an opening effect until the first big winning device 117 is first opened, and a plurality of round games in which the first big winning device 117 repeats opening and closing. And an ending effect from when the first big winning device 117 is closed until the next change of the special symbol is started. The round game refers to one open period of the first big prize device 117, and includes a long open round game and a short open round game.

  In a long open round game, when a predetermined number (9 in the present embodiment) of game balls enter the first big winning device 117, one round game is completed. In addition, even when the specified number of game balls do not enter, one round game ends when the specified number of seconds (29.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses. In such a long open round game, a large number of prize balls can be obtained because a game ball can easily enter the first big prize winning device 117 and a player can acquire a prize ball corresponding to the entered ball. It is.

  Further, when a long open round game is executed, a bonus state is established until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the end of the round game, and the second big winning device 127 is set for a specified number of seconds (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment). The game ball can enter the second big prize device 127 by repeatedly entering the open state. In addition, the predetermined condition is, for example, in the jackpot determination by entering the second starting device 115 in the bonus state, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, or in the high-precision time reduction game state that starts after the end of the round game May have ended.

  As described above, when the long open round game is executed, a bonus state is set after the round game ends, and the second large winning device 127 is opened, so that a larger amount of prize balls can be obtained. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the short open round game, the first big winning device 117 is opened for, for example, 0.1 second, and one round game ends. This is a so-called “paka” opening mode, in which game balls are difficult to enter. Therefore, at the time of the short opening, it is impossible to expect a game ball to enter the first big winning device 117, and almost no prize ball can be expected. Such “big hit games” are digested by so-called “right-handed”. Even if the game ball is short-opened, a prize ball is played if a game ball enters, so that "right-handed" may be instructed.

[Description of jackpot type]
FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the big hit symbol determination table T2 and the distribution ratio of the big hit types. FIG. 6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the special one big hit symbol determination table T2A, FIG. 6 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the special two big hit symbol determination table T2B, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution ratio of a type.

As shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, in the special one big hit symbol determination table T2A and the special two big hit symbol determination table T2B in the present embodiment, “special symbol A”, “specific symbol B”, “Specific symbol C” is set. In the jackpot symbol determination tables T2A and T2B, random numbers (numerical values) of 0 to 9 are assigned to the specific symbols A to C, and the selection ratio of the jackpot symbol is determined by the number of assigned random numbers (numerical values). ing.
Hereinafter, each big hit symbol (big hit type) and its selection ratio will be described.

(1) Specific symbol A: 16R probable variable jackpot The specific symbol A is a jackpot in which 16 long open round games are executed in a jackpot game. In the case of the big hit with the specific symbol A, in the display effect on the main display device 131, the big hit with the specific symbol A is notified by stopping and displaying the three decorative symbols with the double eyes. Further, when a big hit occurs in the specific symbol A, the game state is controlled to a high-accuracy time-short game state after the big hit game ends. At this time, the number of time saving changes is 100 times. As shown in FIGS. 6 (A) and 6 (B), when a big hit occurs in the first special symbol, the hit value is “1, 7”, so that the hit is selected at a rate of 2/10. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol, the hit value is “0, 1, 4, 6, 7, 9”, so that it is selected at a rate of 6/10.
After the 16 long open round games have been executed, the bonus state is reached in which the second big winning device 127 is opened.
(2) Specific symbol B: 4R probability variable jackpot The specific symbol B is a jackpot in which four long open round games are executed in a jackpot game. In the case of a big hit with the specific symbol B, in the display effect on the main display device 131, the big hit in the specific symbol B is notified by stopping and displaying the three decorative symbols with the doubled eyes. In the case of a big hit in the specific symbol B, the game state is controlled to a high-accuracy time-short game state after the big hit game ends. At this time, the number of time saving changes is 100 times. As shown in FIGS. 6 (A) and 6 (B), when a big hit occurs in the first special symbol, the hit value is “0, 2, 4, 5, 8, 9”, so that the ratio is 6/10. Is selected. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol, the hit value is “2, 5, 8”, and is selected at a rate of 3/10.
(3) Specific symbol C: 2R probable variable jackpot The specific symbol C is a jackpot in which two short-open round games are executed in a jackpot game. In the case of a big hit with the specific symbol C, in the display effect on the main display device 131, the special symbol C is notified by stopping the special symbol on the middle symbol of the decorative symbol. The special symbol is, for example, a symbol described as “probable change”. In the case of a big hit in the specific symbol C, the game state is controlled to a high-accuracy time-short game state after the big hit game ends. At this time, the number of time saving changes is 100 times. As shown in FIGS. 6 (A) and 6 (B), when a big hit occurs in the first special symbol, the hit value is “3, 6”, so that it is selected at a rate of 2/10. On the other hand, when the big hit is achieved in the second special symbol, the hit value is “3”, so that the hit is selected at a rate of 1/10.
Hereinafter, the specific symbol A is also referred to as “special A”, the specific symbol B is also referred to as “special B”, and the specific symbol C is also referred to as “special C”.

  As shown in FIG. 6C, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have different jackpot classification allocation ratios. In the first special symbol, the probability of being allocated to the 16R probability variable jackpot is “20%”, the probability of being allocated to the 4R probability variable jackpot is “60%”, and the probability of being allocated to the 2R probability variable jackpot is “20%” In the second special symbol, the probability of being allocated to the 16R probability variable jackpot is “60%”, the probability of being allocated to the 4R probability variable jackpot is “30%”, and the probability of being allocated to the 2R probability variable jackpot is “10%”.

[Explanation of the fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the first special 1 normal variation pattern table T4A. As shown in FIG. 7, the first variation 1 normal variation pattern table T4A has 19 variation patterns from variation pattern 1 to variation pattern 10B. These variation patterns 1 to 10B will be described.

  In the first special 1 normal variation pattern table T4A, there is a variation pattern represented by “variation pattern” + “number” + “alphabet”, but when “variation pattern” + “number” is the same, Basically, the corresponding basic display effect has the same variation pattern. For example, the fluctuation pattern 2A and the fluctuation pattern 2B are basically the same in the basic effect in the normal reach (loss) effect, and may differ in whether or not to execute a pseudo continuous effect described later. Therefore, a variation pattern having the same “variation pattern” + “number” will be regarded as the same type of variation pattern and will be described together.

  The basic display effect is a display effect serving as a base, and is an effect in which the switching timing of the background image, the switching timing of the effect, or the appearance timing of the character are substantially the same.

[Variation pattern 1]
The fluctuation pattern 1 is a fluctuation pattern for executing a normal losing effect. The variation pattern 1 has a variation time of 5 seconds and is selected at a rate of 21/30 in the case of a loss. The normal losing effect is a losing symbol array (for example, “2”, “5”, “1”) indicating that the result of the jackpot determination is losing without the reach forming effect of forming the reach on the main display device 131. ") Is an effect that is formed.

[Variation pattern 2]
The variation pattern 2 is a variation pattern for executing a normal reach (losing) effect as a basic effect. Among them, the fluctuation pattern 2A executes a normal reach (losing) effect (no pseudo continuous effect), has a changing time of 10 seconds, and is selected at 2/30 of the loss. In the normal reach (losing) effect (no pseudo continuous effect), the pseudo continuous effect is not executed on the main display device 131, and after the reach forming effect for forming the reach is executed, the development effect is not performed, and the normal effect is changing. This is an effect in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the reach symbol to form a lost symbol array (for example, “7”, “6”, “7”).

  Here, the pseudo continuous production will be described. Pseudo continuous production (or pseudo continuous fluctuating production) means that during the special symbol fluctuating display, the fancy design is fluctuated and temporarily stopped, and then fluctuated again to display the fancy design fluctuating display. Is an effect that is repeated in a pseudo manner. In this case, in the pseudo continuous production, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this. After the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol is slowed down, and thereafter, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Good.

  The fluctuation pattern 2B executes a normal reach (losing) effect (with pseudo continuous effects), has a changing time of 16 seconds, and is selected as 2/30 of the loss. In this normal reach (losing) production (pseudo continuous production), after the pseudo continuous production is performed on the main display device 131 and the reach formation production for forming the reach is performed, the development production is not performed, and the decoration is fluctuating. This is an effect in which a symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the reach symbol, and a lost symbol array is formed.

[Variation pattern 3]
The variation pattern 3 is a variation pattern when a normal reach (per special C) effect is executed. The fluctuation pattern 3A executes a normal reach (per special C) effect (no pseudo continuous effect), has a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and is selected when the specific symbol C is a big hit. In the normal reach (per special C) production (no pseudo continuous production), after the reach formation production is executed without the pseudo continuous production being performed, the development effect is not performed, and the decorative pattern that is changing stops with a special design This is an effect in which a jackpot symbol array that is displayed and represents the jackpot in the specific symbol C is formed.

  The fluctuation pattern 3B is selected when a normal reach (per special C) effect (with a pseudo continuous effect) is performed, the fluctuation time is 16 seconds, and the specific symbol C is a big hit. In the normal reach (per special C) production (with pseudo continuous production), after the pseudo continuous production is performed and the reach formation production is performed, the development decoration is not performed, and the decorative pattern that is changing is stopped and displayed with a special design. Thus, a jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot in the specific symbol C is formed.

[Variation pattern 4]
The variation pattern 4 is a variation pattern for executing an SP reach (losing) effect. The fluctuation pattern 4A executes an SP reach (loss) effect (no pseudo continuous effect), has a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and is selected at 3/60 in the case of a loss. In the SP reach (losing) production (with pseudo continuous production), a pseudo continuous production is executed, a reach formation production is executed, and then an SP reach production, which is one of the super reach productions, is executed as an advanced production. This is an effect in which a symbol array is formed.

  The fluctuation pattern 4B executes an SP reach (losing) effect (with pseudo continuous effects), has a changing time of 36 seconds, and is selected at 3/60 in the case of a loss. In the SP reach (losing) production (with pseudo continuous production), a pseudo continuous production is executed, a reach formation production is executed, and then an SP reach production, which is one of the super reach productions, is executed as an advanced production. This is an effect in which a symbol array is formed.

[Variation pattern 5]
The variation pattern 5 is a variation pattern for executing an SP reach (per A, per B) effect. The fluctuation pattern 5A executes SP reach (per special A, per special B) production (no pseudo continuous production), has a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and is 1/30 of the case of the big hit in the specific symbol A or the specific symbol B. Is selected. In the SP reach (per special A, per special B) production (no pseudo continuous production), after the reach formation production is performed without performing the pseudo continuous production, the SP reach production is performed and the specific symbol A or the specific design is performed. This is an effect in which a jackpot symbol array (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) representing the jackpot in the symbol B is formed.

  The fluctuation pattern 5B executes SP reach (special A, special B) production (with pseudo continuous production), has a fluctuation time of 36 seconds, and is 4/30 of the case of the big hit in the specific symbol A or the specific symbol B. Is selected. In the SP reach (per special A, per special B) production (with pseudo continuous production), the pseudo continuous production is executed, the reach formation production is executed, then the SP reach production is executed, and the specific symbol A or the specific symbol B is performed. This is an effect in which a jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot is formed.

[Variation pattern 6]
The fluctuation pattern 6 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the SPSP reach (loss) effect 1. In the fluctuation pattern 6A, the SPSP reach (loss) effect 1 (no pseudo continuous effect) is executed, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and 1/60 of the loss case is selected. The SPSP reach (losing) production 1 (no pseudo continuous production) is one of super reach productions as a development production after the reach formation production and the SP reach production are performed without the pseudo continuous production being performed. This is an effect in which a SPSP reach effect is executed to form a lost symbol array.

  In the variation pattern 6B, the SPSP reach (loss) effect 1 (with a pseudo continuous effect) is executed, the variation time is 66 seconds, and 1/60 of the loss is selected. In SPSP reach (losing) production 1 (with pseudo continuous production), after the pseudo continuous production is performed, the reach formation production and the SP reach production are performed, and the SPSP reach which is one of the super reach productions as an advanced production. This is an effect in which an effect is executed to form a lost symbol array.

[Variation pattern 7]
The variation pattern 7 is a variation pattern for executing the SPSP reach (per A, per B) effect 1. In the variation pattern 7A, the SPSP reach (per special A, per special B) effect 1 (no pseudo run) is executed, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the special symbol A or the specific symbol B is 3/30 of the big hit. Is selected. In SPSP Reach (Special A, Special B) production 1 (no pseudo run), after the reach formation production and the SP production are performed without performing the pseudo continuous production, the SPSP reach production is executed and the specific design is executed. This is an effect in which a jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot in A or a specific symbol B is formed.

  In the variation pattern 7B, the SPSP reach (special A, special B) effect 1 (with a pseudo-run) is executed, the fluctuation time is 66 seconds, and the special symbol A or the specific symbol B has a big hit of 7/30. Is selected. In the SPSP reach (per special A, per special B) effect 1 (with pseudo-sequence), the pseudo-sequence effect is executed, after the reach formation effect and the SP effect are executed, the SPSP reach effect is executed, and the specific symbol A or This is an effect in which a jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot in a specific symbol B is formed.

[Variation pattern 8]
The variation pattern 8 is a variation pattern for executing the SPSP reach (loss) effect 2. In the variation pattern 8A, the SPSP reach (loss) effect 2 (no pseudo continuous effect) is executed, the variation time is 60 seconds, and 1/60 of the loss is selected. SPSP reach (losing) production 2 (no pseudo continuous production) is one of super reach productions as a development production after the reach formation production and the SP reach production are performed without the pseudo continuous production being performed. This is an effect in which a SPSP reach effect is executed to form a lost symbol array.

  In the variation pattern 8B, the SPSP reach (losing) effect 2 (with pseudo continuous effects) is executed, the changing time is 66 seconds, and 1/60 of the loss is selected. In SPSP reach (losing) production 2 (with pseudo continuous production), pseudo continuous production is executed, reach formation production and SP reach production are performed, and then SPSP reach which is one of super reach productions as an advanced production. This is an effect in which an effect is executed to form a lost symbol array.

[Variation pattern 9]
The fluctuation pattern 9 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the SPSP reach (per A, per B) effect 2. In the variation pattern 9A, the SPSP reach (per A, per B) effect 2 (no pseudo continuous effect) is executed, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the special pattern A or the specific symbol B is 3 / Selected at 30. In SPSP reach (per special A, per special B) production 2 (no pseudo continuous production), the pseudo formation production is not executed, the reach formation production and the SP production are executed, and then the SPSP reach production is executed and specified. This is an effect in which a jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot in the symbol A or the specific symbol B is formed.

  In the variation pattern 9B, the SPSP reach (special A, special B) production 2 (with pseudo continuous production) is executed, the fluctuation time is 66 seconds, and the special pattern A or the specific design B has 7 / Selected at 30. In SPSP reach (per special A, per special B) production 2 (with pseudo continuous production), pseudo continuous production is performed, reach formation production and SP production are performed, then SPSP reach production is performed, and specific symbol A Or, it is an effect in which a jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot in the specific symbol B is formed.

[Variation pattern 10]
The fluctuation pattern 10 is a fluctuation pattern for executing a SPSP reach revival (per A, per B) effect. In the variation pattern 10A, the SPSP reach revival (special A, special B) production (no pseudo continuous production) is executed, the fluctuation time is 80 seconds, and 1 / the case of the big hit in the specific symbol A or the specific symbol B. Selected at 30. In the SPSP reach revival (special A, per special B) production (no pseudo continuous production), the reach formation production, the SP production, and the SPSP reach production are performed without performing the pseudo continuous production, and the lost pattern arrangement is once performed. After the temporary stop display, a resurrection effect of re-changing the decoration symbol is executed, and a jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot in the specific symbol A or the specific symbol B is formed.

  In the variation pattern 10B, the SPSP reach revival (special A, special B) production (with pseudo continuous production) is executed, the fluctuation time is 86 seconds, and the specific pattern A or the specific pattern B is 4 / Selected at 30. In the SPSP reach revival (special A, special B) production (with pseudo continuous production), pseudo continuous production is performed, reach formation production, SP production, and SPSP reach production are performed, and then temporarily stopped in the lost symbol arrangement After the display, a resurrection effect of re-changing the decorative symbol is executed, and a jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot in the specific symbol A or the specific symbol B is formed.

  In the present embodiment, as a display effect based on the fluctuation pattern, the degree of expectation at which the SP reach effect is performed is higher than that at which the normal reach effect is performed. ) Is set so as to increase the selectivity of the variation pattern. Further, the selectivity of the variation pattern is set such that the big hit expectation is higher when the SPSP reach effect is performed than when the SP reach effect is performed.

  Next, in the first variation pattern table T4, the first variation pattern table T4B at the time of the first special probability change, the first variation pattern table T4C at the time of the first special 2 normal, and the first variation pattern table T4D at the time of the first special 2 probability variation. Although not shown, the following description will be made based on comparison with the first variation 1 normal variation first variation pattern table T4A.

  The first variation 1 first variation pattern table T4B has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 11 to 20B), and the variation patterns 12A to 20B of these variation patterns are the first variation 1 normal. Each of the 18 first variation pattern tables T4A is the same as the 18 variation patterns (variation patterns 2A to 10B). The variation pattern 11 included in the first variation pattern table T4B at the time of the first variation 1 probability variation is a variation pattern for executing a normal loss effect similarly to the variation pattern 1 included in the first variation pattern table T4A during the first variation 1. However, the fluctuation time is longer than the fluctuation pattern 1, and the fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds.

  The first variation 2 normal-time first variation pattern table T4C has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 21 to 30B), and these variation patterns 21 to 30B are the first variation 1 normal-time first variation patterns. These are the same as the 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 1 to 10B) of the table T4A.

  The first variation pattern table T4D at the time of the first extraordinary probability change has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 31 to 40B). Among these fluctuation patterns, the fluctuation patterns 32A to 32A are the same as the 18 fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns 2A to 10B) of the first special-normal-time first fluctuation pattern table T4A. The variation pattern 31 included in the first variation pattern table T4D at the time of the first special 2 probability variation is a variation pattern for executing a normal loss effect like the variation pattern 1 included in the first variation pattern table T4A at the time of the first special 1 normal. However, the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern 1, and the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds.

  Next, in the second variation pattern table T5, the second variation 1 normal variation pattern table T5A, the second variation 1 probability variation variation pattern table T5B, the second variation 2 normal variation pattern table T5C, and the second variation 2 probability variation table T5C. Although not shown, the time variation pattern table T5D will be described below based on a comparison with the first variation pattern table T4.

  The second special 1 normal variation pattern table T5A has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 1X to 10BX). These 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 1X to 10BX) are variation patterns for executing the same basic effect as variation patterns 1 to 10B of the first variation 1 normal variation first variation pattern table T4A. The fluctuation time is set to be about 10 seconds longer than each of the fluctuation patterns 1 to 10B of the first fluctuation pattern table T4A.

  The second special first-variation-variation-variation pattern table T5B has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 11X to 20BX). These 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 11X to 20BX) are variation patterns for executing the same basic effect as the variation patterns 11 to 20B included in the first special-precision variation time variation pattern table T4B. In comparison with the variation patterns 11 to 20B included in the 1-variation pattern table T4B, the variation time is set to be longer by about 10 seconds.

  The second special 2 normal-time variation pattern table T5C has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 21X to 30BX). These 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 21X to 30BX) are variation patterns for executing the same basic effect as the variation patterns 21 to 30B included in the first special 2 normal variation pattern table T4C. The fluctuation time is set to be about 10 seconds longer than each of the fluctuation patterns 21 to 30B included in the 1-time 2 normal-time fluctuation pattern table T4C.

  The second extraordinary variation time variation pattern table T5D has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 31X to 40BX). These 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 31X to 40BX) are variation patterns for executing the same basic effect as the variation patterns 31 to 40B of the first extraordinary variation time variation pattern table T4D. The fluctuation time is set to be longer by about 10 seconds than the fluctuation patterns 31 to 40B included in the fluctuation pattern table T5D at the time of the 2nd 2 probability change.

  That is, each variation pattern in the second variation pattern table T5 is set to have a variation time that is about 10 seconds longer than each corresponding variation pattern in the first variation pattern table T4.

[List of processes in main control board 300]
FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a schematic flow of a process executed by the main control board 300.
When power is supplied, the main CPU 301a of the main control board 300 executes main processing based on a program stored in the main ROM 301b. The main CPU 301a executes, as a main process, a power restoration process for restoring the gaming state before the power shutdown from the power shutdown, or a RAM clear process for initializing the main RAM 301c. Further, the main CPU 301a updates the initial values of various random numbers (for example, jackpot random numbers) as main processing.
Further, the main CPU 301a repeatedly executes the timer interrupt process at regular intervals (for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds) during the execution of the main process. Hereinafter, various processes of the timer interrupt process will be described.

[Random number update processing]
First, the main CPU 301a executes a random number update process. This random number updating process updates various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, a variation pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number. These random numbers are incremented by "1" each time this process is performed. Note that each random number value is returned to “0” after reaching the preset maximum value.

[Switch processing]
Subsequently, the main CPU 301a performs a switch process. This switch processing is performed when a detection signal is input from each switch. The switch process includes a start device switch process, a gate switch process, a first big win device switch process, a second big win device switch process, and the like. The starting device switch process includes a preliminary determination process.

[Starter switch processing]
The main CPU 301a acquires a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number when the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115 has a ball as a starting device switch process, These are stored as suspension information in the suspension information storage area 301cx (suspension information area: see FIG. 4-2 (B)) of the main RAM 301c. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting device 112 and acquires the hold information for the first special symbol, the main CPU 301a stores the hold information in the hold information area corresponding to the first special symbol in the hold information storage area 301cx. Is specified, and the hold information is stored in the hold information area that should be stored with priority next to the hold information area. However, when the suspension information is stored in the fourth suspension information area, the suspension information is not stored. The same processing is performed when the hold information for the second special symbol is acquired.

  When storing the hold information in the hold information storage area 301cx (hold information storage area) as the starting device switch processing, the main CPU 301a associates the hold information in the hold information area with the hold information and obtains the hold order information at the time of acquisition. Is stored. In this case, when the suspension information is acquired, if the suspension information is not stored in the suspension information area, the suspension information is stored in the first suspension information area. , "1".

[Advance judgment processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the preliminary determination processing executed by the CPU 301a of the main control board 300. The main CPU 301a executes a preliminary determination process during the above-described starter switch process. In this pre-determination process, when the ball is entered into the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115, the acquired suspension information and the acquisition suspension order information are stored in the suspension information storage area 301cx (suspension information area). Before hitting, the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol determination, the reach determination, and the variation pattern determination are executed based on the suspension information. That is, in this preliminary determination process, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 301cx (hold information area) is shifted to the hold information determination area 301cy, and the big hit determination is performed before the special symbol determination is performed. This is a process for specifying in advance the result, the jackpot symbol determination result, the reach determination result, and the fluctuation pattern determination result.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the process of S1001, the main CPU 301a executes a jackpot determination based on the acquired suspension information (jackpot random number), and determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred. If the main CPU 301a determines that it is a big hit (S1001: YES), in the processing of S1002, it executes a big hit symbol determination, and specifies a big hit symbol (specific symbol A, B, C) as a special symbol, After that, the processing shifts to the processing of S1004. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines that it is not a jackpot (S1001: NO), that is, if it determines that a loss has occurred, the main CPU 301a identifies a loss symbol as a special symbol in the process of S1003, and then proceeds to S1004. I do. Next, in the process of S1004, the main CPU 301a executes a fluctuation pattern determination and specifies the fluctuation pattern. Subsequently, the main CPU 301a generates a hold command in the process of S1005. The suspension command includes the suspension additional information indicating that the suspension information has been added to the suspension information storage area 301cx, the specified special symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as a special symbol for advance determination), and the specified special symbol. A fluctuation pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a pre-judgment fluctuation pattern) and acquisition-time suspension order information associated with the suspension information are included. The special symbol for preliminary determination, the variation pattern for preliminary determination, and the information on the order of suspension at the time of acquisition are collectively referred to as preliminary determination information.

[Gate switch processing]
In addition, as a gate switch process, when a game ball passes through the gate 113b, the main CPU 301a acquires a normal symbol random number and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 301c.

[1st big winning device switch processing]
The main CPU 301a detects, as the first big prize device switch process, a game ball that has won the first big prize device 117 during the execution of the big hit game (during the big hit game state). In this case, the main CPU 301a stores the number of gaming balls paid out to the player based on the winning in the first big winning device 117 in the acquired payout ball equivalent information storage area 301cz of the main RAM 301c in the big hit game state. It is added to the number represented by the stored payout equivalent information.

  In addition, when the time-saving gaming state ends, the main CPU 301a resets (erases) the acquired payout equivalent information stored in the acquired payout equivalent information storage area 301cz. As a result, the acquired payout equivalent information stored in the acquired payout equivalent information storage area 301cz is shifted to the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state at the time of the initial jackpot and while the time-saving gaming state is continued. Represents the sum of the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state. That is, the number represented by the acquired payout ball equivalent information is the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state at the time of consecutive chan.

  Further, when the acquired payout equivalent information is updated in the first big winning device switch processing, the main CPU 301a sets an acquired payout equivalent information command representing the acquired payout equivalent information.

[Second big win device switch processing]
The main CPU 301a detects the game ball that has won the second big winning device 127 during the big hit game (during the big hit game state) as the second big winning device switch process. In this case, the main CPU 301a stores the number of game balls paid out to the player based on winning in the second big winning device 127 in the acquired payout ball equivalent information storage area 301cz of the main RAM 301c in the big hit game state. It is added to the number represented by the stored payout equivalent information.

  In addition, when the time-saving gaming state ends, the main CPU 301a resets (erases) the acquired payout equivalent information stored in the acquired payout equivalent information storage area 301cz. As a result, the acquired payout equivalent information stored in the acquired payout equivalent information storage area 301cz is shifted to the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state at the time of the initial jackpot and while the time-saving gaming state is continued. Represents the sum of the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state. That is, the number represented by the acquired payout ball equivalent information is the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state at the time of consecutive chan.

  Further, when the acquired payout equivalent information is updated in the second big winning device switch processing, the main CPU 301a sets an acquired payout equivalent information command representing the acquired payout equivalent information.

[Special design processing]
After the switch process, the main CPU 301a performs a special symbol process which is a process relating to a special symbol. The special symbol processing includes a hold information shift process, a big hit determination process, a big hit symbol determination process, a reach determination process, a variation pattern setting process, and a special symbol stop process. Each processing of the special symbol processing will be described below.

[Suspend information shift processing]
The main CPU 301a executes a hold information shift process. Specifically, when the special symbol change display is completed, the main CPU 301a shifts the suspension information and the acquisition-time suspension order information in the suspension information storage area 301cx of the main RAM 301c. For example, the main CPU 301a stores the hold information for the first special symbol in the first hold information area and the second hold information area in the hold information storage area 301cx, and stores the hold information for the second special symbol. If the special symbol change display is completed in a state where the special symbol is not displayed, the hold information in the second hold information area corresponding to the first special symbol and the hold order information at the time of acquisition are shifted to the first hold information area. The hold information in the 1 hold information area and the hold order information at the time of acquisition are shifted to the hold information determination area 301cy of the main RAM 301c.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the main CPU 301a executes a jackpot determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301a executes the jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number and the jackpot determination table T1 included in the hold information shifted to the hold information determination area 301cy by the hold information shift processing. In this case, when the gaming state is the non-probable variable gaming state, the non-probable variable jackpot determination table T1A is used, and when the gaming state is the probable variable gaming state, the probable variable jackpot determination table T1B is used.

[Big hit symbol judgment processing]
Next, the main CPU 301a executes a jackpot symbol determination process. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is completed, the main CPU 301a stores the jackpot symbol random number and the jackpot symbol determination table T2 included in the hold information shifted by the hold information shift process when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. Based on this, a jackpot symbol determination is executed to determine a jackpot symbol (special symbol). In this case, if the type of the shifted hold information is the first special symbol, the special special jackpot symbol determination table T2A is used. If the type of the shifted hold information is the second special symbol, the special second hit symbol is determined. The big hit symbol determination table T2B is used. On the other hand, the main CPU 301a determines a predetermined losing symbol (special symbol) when the losing is determined in the jackpot determination.

[Reach judgment processing]
Next, the main CPU 301a executes a reach determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301a executes the reach determination based on the reach random number included in the shifted suspension information and the reach determination table T3. In this case, if the gaming state is the non-probable changing gaming state and the type of the hold information is the first special symbol, the special 1 normal time reach determination table is used. When the game state is the probable change game state and the type of the held information is the first special symbol, the reach determination table for special 1 probable change is used. When the gaming state is the non-probable changing gaming state and the type of the hold information is the second special symbol, the special 2 normal time reach determination table is used. When the game state is the probable change game state and the type of the hold information is the second special symbol, the special 2 probable change time reach determination table is used.

[Variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the main CPU 301a executes a variation pattern setting process. Specifically, first, the main CPU 301a determines whether to select the first variation pattern table T4 or the second variation pattern table T5 based on the information on the order of suspension at the time of acquisition. For example, if the pending order at the time of acquisition is “3” or “4”, the first variation pattern table T4 is selected, and if the pending order at the time of acquisition is “1” or “2”, Selects the second variation pattern table T5.

  Next, the main CPU 301a selects which of the four variation pattern tables included in the selected variation pattern table to use based on the gaming state and the type of the special symbol. For example, when the first variation pattern table T4 is selected, one variation pattern table is selected from the four variation pattern tables T4A to T4D of the first variation pattern table T4. In this case, when the game state is the non-probable change game state and the type of the hold information is the first special symbol, the first special 1 normal time fluctuation pattern table T4A is used. When the game state is the probable change game state and the type of the hold information is the first special symbol, the first special 1 probable change time variation pattern table T4B is used. When the game state is the non-probable change game state and the type of the hold information is the second special symbol, the first special 2 normal fluctuation pattern table T4C is used. When the game state is the probable change game state and the type of the hold information is the second special symbol, the first special 2 probable change time variation pattern table T4D is used.

  Further, for example, when the second variation pattern table T5 is selected, one variation pattern table is selected from the four variation pattern tables T5A to T5D of the second variation pattern table T5. In this case, when the game state is the non-probable change game state and the type of the hold information is the first special symbol, the second special 1 normal time fluctuation pattern table T5A is used. When the game state is the probable change game state and the type of the hold information is the first special symbol, the second special 1 probable change time variation pattern table T5B is used. When the game state is the non-probable change game state and the type of the hold information is the second special symbol, the second special 2 normal time fluctuation pattern table T5C is used. When the game state is the probable change game state and the type of the hold information is the second special symbol, the second special 2 probable change time variation pattern table T5D is used.

  Next, the main CPU 301a executes the fluctuation pattern determination based on the result of the jackpot symbol determination, the result of the reach determination, the fluctuation pattern random number included in the shifted hold information, and the selected fluctuation pattern table. To determine. In this case, for example, when a specific symbol is determined as a result of the jackpot symbol determination, a variation pattern corresponding to the effect content of the specific symbol is selected from the variation patterns in the selected variation pattern table. If it is determined that the reach is to be performed as a result of the reach determination, a variation pattern corresponding to the effect content to execute the reach is selected from the variation patterns in the selected variation pattern table. When determining the variation pattern, the main CPU 301a sets a variation start command including the determined variation pattern.

[Special symbol stop processing]
The main CPU 301a executes a special symbol stop process. Specifically, after the fluctuation pattern setting process, the main CPU 301a displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122 in a variable manner, based on the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination. When the time elapses, the changing special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the jackpot symbol determination is notified by the stopped and displayed special symbol. In this case, the main CPU 301a sets a symbol confirmation command.

  Further, in the special symbol stop process, after stopping and displaying the changing special symbol, the main CPU 301a determines whether or not to turn on the big hit game flag based on the determination result of the big hit symbol determination, and determines that it is to be turned on. If so, a process of turning on the big hit game flag is executed.

  In this special symbol processing, when the time-saving game flag and the probable change game flag are ON, and when the number of time-saving changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the main CPU 301a sets the time-saving game flag and the probable change game flag. Is also executed.

[Normal symbol processing]
The main CPU 301a normally performs symbol processing. The normal symbol processing includes a normal symbol determination process, an operation pattern setting process, and an opening / closing member control process. Each process of the normal symbol process will be described below.

[Normal symbol judgment processing]
The main CPU 301a executes a normal symbol determination process. Specifically, when there is the ordinary symbol hold information, the main CPU 301a executes the ordinary symbol determination based on the ordinary symbol random number included in the hold information and the ordinary symbol determination table T6.

[Operation pattern setting processing]
The main CPU 301a performs an operation pattern setting process for the movable piece 115b when it is determined that the winning is determined in the normal symbol determination. More specifically, the main CPU 301a sets an operation pattern in which opening for 0.1 second is performed twice when the game is in the non-time saving game state (total opening control time is 0.2 seconds). Sets an operation pattern in which opening for 0.5 seconds is performed five times (total opening control time is 2.5 seconds). The main CPU 301a does not set an operation pattern when the result of the ordinary symbol determination is a loss.

[Opening / closing symbol control processing]
The main CPU 301a executes an opening / closing member control process. Specifically, after executing the ordinary symbol determination, the main CPU 301a causes the ordinary symbol display device 118 to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the ordinary symbol indicating the determination result of the ordinary symbol determination. In this case, the variable number of seconds of the normal symbol is set to 12 seconds when the game is in the non-time saving game state, and is set to 3 seconds when the game is in the time saving game state. After normally stopping and displaying the symbol, the main CPU 301a controls the opening and closing of the movable piece 115b based on the operation pattern if the operation pattern is set in the operation pattern setting process.

[Grand prize device opening control process]
Subsequently, the main CPU 301a performs a special winning device opening control process. The big winning device opening control process includes an opening pattern setting process and a game state setting process of the first big winning device 117 and the second big winning device 127.

[Open pattern setting processing]
When the big hit game flag is ON, the main CPU 301a sets the opening pattern of the first big winning device 117 and the second big winning device 127 based on the result of the big hit symbol determination during the opening effect. Perform the setting process. When the opening effect is completed, the main CPU 301a controls the opening and closing of the first big winning device 117 based on the set opening pattern to realize a round game. In addition, when the round game is continued for 16 rounds, when the game of 16 rounds by the first big prize winning device 117 is completed (the first big prize winning device 117 is closed), the second large winning prize device 117 is closed based on the set opening pattern. Opening / closing control of the winning device 127 is performed to realize a bonus game.

[Game state setting process]
In addition, when the ending effect ends, the main CPU 301a executes a process of turning off the big hit game flag, a process of turning on the time saving game flag, and the process of turning on the certainty changing game flag, and sets the number of time saving changes to a predetermined number of times (for example, , 8000 times).

[Payout process]
Subsequently, the main CPU 301a executes a payout process. This payout process is a process of controlling the payout of prize balls according to the winning of game balls.

[Command transmission processing]
Next, the main CPU 301a executes a command transmission process. In this command transmission process, various commands set (stored) in the main RAM 301c in the above process and information necessary for determining the effect contents are transmitted to the effect control board 320.

[Electrical Configuration of Effect Control Board 320]
FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing details of the effect control board 320. The effect control board 320 determines an effect pattern based on a command (including a variation pattern) transmitted from the main control board 300, and sends an effect pattern designation command based on the effect pattern to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340. Send. As described above, the main display device 131 and the audio output device 331 are electrically connected to the image control board 330, and the frame lighting device 345, the board lighting device 347, The frame driving device 346 and the panel driving device 348 are electrically connected. With this configuration, the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 execute the display effect, the sound effect, the lighting effect, and the movable object effect based on the effect pattern designation command transmitted from the effect control substrate 320. Becomes possible.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the sub-ROM 320b stores a main display effect designation table TS1, a decorative symbol determination table TS2, and a chance up determination table TS3.

  The basic display effect designation table TS1 is based on the fluctuation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300, the normal loss effect, the normal reach (loss or hit) effect, the SP reach (loss or hit) effect, and the SPSP reach (loss or hit). One of the win 1 effect, the SPSP reach (losing or hit) effect 2 and the SPSP reach revival (hit) effect is a key effect in the display effect (hereinafter also referred to as a key display effect). It is a table to specify as. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300 and the basic display effect correspond one-to-one.

  Note that a plurality of key display effects may be associated with the variation pattern, and the sub CPU 320a of the effect control board 320 may select the key display effect by lottery. In this way, the effect contents can be changed even for the same fluctuation pattern. Further, one basic display effect may be made to correspond to a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

  The decorative symbol determination table TS2 is a table for determining a combination of decorative symbols for provisional stop display and fixed stop display in a display effect based on an effect pattern, and a reach symbol when performing reach.

  The chance-up determination table TS3 is a table for determining a predetermined chance-up effect in a display effect. Here, the chance-up effect is an effect for executing a display effect in a mode different from the normal effect, and for increasing the degree of expectation of the jackpot as compared with the normal effect.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the sub RAM 320c is provided with a reserved storage area 320c1, an acquired payout equivalent information storage area 320c2, and a preliminary determination information storage area 320c3.

  The reserved storage area 320c1 includes a first reserved area, a second reserved area, a third reserved area, and a fourth reserved area corresponding to the first special symbol, a first reserved area corresponding to the second special symbol, and a second reserved area. The area is divided into eight areas of a reserved area, a third reserved area, and a fourth reserved area, and one reserved flag can be stored in each of the eight areas. In the reserved area corresponding to the first special symbol in the reserved storage area 320c1, the priority of storing the reserved flag is such that the first reserved area is the highest priority storage target and the reserved flag is stored in the first reserved area. For example, next, the second reserved area is set as the storage target with priority, the third reserved area is set as the storage target with priority, and finally, the fourth reserved area is selected as the storage target. The same applies to the reserved area corresponding to the second special symbol. When the effect control board 320 receives the hold command from the main control board 300, the hold area in which the hold flag is stored is specified in the hold storage area 320c1, and the hold area to be stored with priority next to the hold area is specified. To store the hold flag. However, if a hold command is received while the hold flag is stored in the fourth hold area, the hold flag is not stored.

  Further, the priority order of erasure of the hold flag is the reverse of the priority order in the case of storing, that is, the fourth hold area is to be erased with the highest priority and the hold flag is not stored in the fourth hold area. Next, the third reserved area is prioritized for erasing, the second reserved area is prioritized for erasing, and finally, the first reserved area is selected for erasing. When the effect control board 320 receives the symbol determination command from the main control board 300, the hold area where the hold flag is stored is specified in the hold storage area 320c1, and the hold flag of the hold area to be deleted with priority is deleted. . If the hold flag is not stored in the first hold area, the erasing process is not performed.

  The acquired payout equivalent information storage area 320c2 is an area for storing the acquired payout equivalent information represented by the acquired payout equivalent information command transmitted from the main control board 300. This acquired payout equivalent information is overwritten and saved each time the acquired payout equivalent information command is transmitted.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the preliminary determination information storage area 320c3 provided in the sub RAM 320c. The pre-determination information storage area 320c3 is a storage area for storing pre-determination information (special symbol for pre-determination, variation pattern for pre-determination, and hold order information at the time of acquisition). , Four storage areas (a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area) are provided. In each storage area, a jackpot determination information column for storing jackpot determination information based on the special symbol for preliminary determination, a jackpot symbol information column for storing jackpot symbol information based on the symbol for preliminary determination, and a variable for preliminary determination. A variation pattern information column for storing variation pattern information based on a pattern, an acquisition suspension order information column for storing acquisition suspension order information, and a continuous production presence / absence information for storing continuous production presence / absence information indicating presence / absence of continuous production. And a column. Although details will be described later, the continuous production presence / absence information includes continuous production start motion information and continuous production non-activation information.

  The hold command (FIG. 9: S1005) transmitted from the main control board 300 includes advance determination information (special symbols for advance determination, variation patterns for advance determination, and hold order information at the time of acquisition). These pieces of pre-determination information are stored in the pre-determination information storage area 320c3 in association with each other. In the storage area for the first special symbol, the priority order for storing the pre-judgment information is such that the first storage area is the highest priority storage object and if the pre-judgment information is stored in the first storage area, The second storage area is prioritized for storage, the third storage area is prioritized for storage, and finally the fourth storage area is selected for storage. The same applies to the storage area for the second special symbol. For example, in a state where the preliminary determination information has already been stored in the third storage area of the first special symbol, the preliminary determination information of the new first special symbol (specific symbol A, variation pattern 7B, acquisition pending order information “4 )) (See FIG. 11), the information indicating “4” is stored in the acquisition-time pending order information column of the fourth storage area, and “variation pattern 7B” is stored in the variation pattern information column of the fourth storage area. Is stored in the jackpot symbol information field of the fourth storage area, and information representing "big hit" is stored in the jackpot determination information field of the fourth storage area.

  In FIG. 11, as the pre-judgment information of the first storage area relating to the first special symbol, the information of “losing” is recorded in the jackpot determination information column, the information of “none” is recorded in the jackpot symbol information column, and the fluctuation pattern information column. The information of “variation pattern 1” is stored in the information field of “suspension pattern at the time of acquisition”, and the information of “3” is stored in the information column of the pending order at the time of acquisition. When the information of "losing" is obtained in the jackpot determination information column, the information of "none" is obtained in the jackpot symbol information column, and the information of "variation pattern 2AX" is obtained in the variation pattern information column as the preliminary determination information of the second storage area. Information indicating “1” is stored in the suspension order information column. As the pre-determination information of the third storage area, information of “losing” in the jackpot determination information column, information of “none” in the jackpot symbol information column, and information of “variation pattern 4BX” in the variation pattern information column are acquired. Information indicating “2” is stored in the pending order information column.

  Further, in the continuous effect presence / absence information column, continuous effect departure motion information indicating whether or not a continuous effect is to be executed in a prefetching process described later is stored. In FIG. 11, in the continuous performance presence / absence information column corresponding to the fourth storage area related to the first special symbol, “○” is shown as continuous performance departure motion information, which is information indicating the activation of the continuous performance, and other storage is performed. In the area, "-" is shown as continuous production non-activation information, which is information indicating that continuous production is not to be activated.

  The sub RAM 320c also has a flag storage area (not shown) for storing a predetermined flag and the like. For example, the flag storage area stores a continuous execution effect flag, a pseudo continuous effect execution flag, and the like, which will be described later.

[List of processing in effect control board 320]
FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of processes executed by the effect control board 320. When the power is supplied, the sub CPU 320a of the effect control board 320 executes the effect main process.

[Direction main processing]
The sub CPU 320a executes a power restoration effect process corresponding to the power restoration process executed on the main control board 300 or a RAM clear effect process corresponding to the RAM clear process executed on the main control board 300 as the effect main process. I do.
Further, the sub CPU 320a repeatedly executes the effect timer interrupt process at regular intervals (for example, 2 milliseconds) during the execution of the effect main process. The processing performed by the effect control board 320 is executed based on a program stored in the sub ROM 320b.

[Direction timer interrupt processing]
The sub CPU 320a executes a random number updating process, a command receiving process, a rendering button process, and a command transmission process in the rendering timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, various processes of the effect timer interrupt process will be described.

[Random number update processing]
The sub CPU 320a updates various random numbers (for example, a decorative symbol determination random number, a chance up random number) used for the effect as random number updating processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 320a adds and updates “1” to various random numbers, and resets to “0” when the random number reaches a predetermined value.

[Command reception processing]
The sub CPU 320a performs a command reading process as a pre-reading process, an effect pattern determination process, a hold process, a pre-determination information shift process, a general symbol effect process, a symbol determination process, an acquired ball equivalent information storage process, Perform jackpot processing. Hereinafter, various processes of the command receiving process will be described.

[Prefetch processing]
The pre-reading process performs a process of determining whether or not to perform a continuous effect based on a hold command transmitted from the main control board 300 and a process of determining whether or not to perform a pseudo continuous effect. Details of the prefetching process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The continuous effect is an effect that can be executed on the main display device 131, and is an effect that can be executed during a later-described change start effect over a plurality of change displays in a special symbol. This continuous effect may be composed of only one type of effect, or may include a plurality of types of effects. When the continuous effect includes a plurality of types of effects, one of the plurality of types of effects may be selected and executed. In addition, the continuous effect may be executed for one change display in the special symbol.

  In addition, the pseudo continuous production may be composed of only one type of production, or may include a plurality of types of production. When the pseudo consecutive effects include a plurality of types of effects, one of the plurality of types of effects may be selected and executed.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
The sub CPU 320a determines an effect pattern based on the main display effect designating table TS1, the decorative symbol determining table TS2, and the chance up determining table TS3 as the effect pattern determining process. Details of the effect pattern determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Hold processing]
The sub CPU 320a performs the suspension process when the suspension command is received from the main control board 300 and the suspension flag is not stored in the fourth suspension area in the suspension storage area 320c1 provided in the sub RAM 320c. A hold flag is stored in a hold area having a high storage priority. For example, when a hold command is received in a state where the hold flag is stored in the first and second hold areas, the sub CPU 320a stores the hold flag in the third hold area. In addition, when the effect pattern is determined in the effect pattern determination process (when the fluctuation start command is received), the sub CPU 320a deletes one hold flag from the hold area having a higher priority of deleting the hold flag as the hold process. I do. The sub CPU 320a deletes the hold flag in the fourth hold area when the effect pattern is determined (when the change start command is received) in a state where the hold flags are stored in the first to fourth hold areas. .

  In addition, the sub CPU 320a executes a process related to the hold display as the hold process. Specifically, a hold display command for performing a hold display on the main display device 131 is set corresponding to the four hold areas of the hold storage area 320c1. For example, in the state where the hold flags are stored in the first to third hold areas in the hold storage area 320c1, a hold display command indicating that there are three holds in the main display device 131 is set. This hold display command is transmitted to the image control board 330 in a command transmission process described later. When receiving the hold display command, the image control board 330 controls the main display device 131 to execute the hold display based on the hold display command.

[Predetermination information shift processing]
When the effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determination process (when a change start command is received), the sub CPU 320a is stored in the storage region of the prior determination information storage region 320c3 of the sub RAM 320c as the shift process of the advance determination information. The shift processing of the pre-judgment information is performed. For example, when the pre-determination information is shifted when the pre-determination information is stored as shown in FIG. 11, the information stored in the first storage area is deleted and the information stored in the second storage area is deleted. The information is shifted to the first storage area, the information stored in the third storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the information stored in the fourth storage area is shifted to the third storage area. Therefore, the number of the preliminary determination information (a set of the big hit determination information, the big hit design information, and the variation pattern information) stored in the first storage area to the fourth storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and the number of the main control board 300 The number of pieces of hold information for the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 301c (hold information storage area 301cx: see FIG. 4-2) corresponds one-to-one. Similarly, the number of pieces of pre-judgment information (one set of jackpot determination information, jackpot symbol information, and change pattern information) stored in the first storage area to the fourth storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, The number of pieces of hold information for the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 301c (hold information storage area 301cx) of the 300 corresponds to one-to-one. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, if the pre-determination information is stored in all of the first storage area to the fourth storage area for the first special symbol, the main RAM 301c of the main control board 300 (the hold information storage area 301cx). The number of pieces of suspension information for the first special symbol stored in the.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the hold information, and when the special symbol is stopped and the next symbol change is performed, the second special symbol is changed. Special symbol determination is performed by using the hold information preferentially. Therefore, when the preliminary determination information is stored in each of the storage areas corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the preliminary determination information storage area 320c3, the change of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and When the shift to the variable effect is performed, the shift processing of the advance determination information of the storage area corresponding to the second special symbol is performed.

[Normal design effect processing]
In the normal symbol effect processing, an effect corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is performed in a predetermined area of the main display device 131 (for example, a corner of the main display device 131) according to the determination result in the normal symbol determination. For example, during the change of the normal symbol, “O” and “X” are displayed alternately, and according to the determination result, “O” is displayed if a hit is made, and “X” is displayed if a loss is made.

[Symbol confirmation processing]
The sub CPU 320a executes a process for fixing and displaying the changing decorative symbol on the main display device 131 based on a symbol fixing command from the main control board 300 as a symbol fixing process.

[Acquisition payout equivalent information storage processing]
When receiving the acquired payout equivalent information command from the main control board 300 as the acquired payout equivalent information storage process, the sub CPU 320a stores the acquired payout equivalent information represented by the command in the acquired payout equivalent information stored in the sub RAM 320c. It is stored in the area 320c2.

[Big hit processing]
By receiving a predetermined command from the main control board 300 as a jackpot process, the sub CPU 320a performs an opening process for executing an opening effect at the beginning of the jackpot game, a round effect corresponding to a round game during the jackpot game. An ending process for executing an ending effect is performed at the end of the round process for executing the game and the jackpot game.

[Direction button processing]
The sub CPU 320a detects an input via the sword handle unit 135 and the effect operation stick 136 as effect button processing, and performs a predetermined effect according to the input.

[Command transmission processing]
The sub CPU 320a transmits the command set in the various processes to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 as a command transmission process.

[Explanation of prefetch processing]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the prefetching process. Here, the above-described prefetching processing will be described below.
In this pre-reading process, first, the sub CPU 320a executes a hold command receiving process in the process of S1305. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from main control board 300, and if a hold command has been received, the advance determination information included in the hold command is stored in corresponding storage in advance determination information storage area 320c3. Store in area. If the hold command has not been received, the pre-reading process ends without executing the continuous effect flag setting process and the pseudo consecutive effect flag setting process described later.

  Subsequently, after the hold command receiving process, the sub CPU 320a executes a continuous effect flag setting process in the process of S1310. Specifically, when the continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is OFF, the sub CPU 320a determines whether or not to execute the continuous effect based on the advance determination information received in the process of S1305, in other words, It is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is to be turned ON. More specifically, the sub CPU 320a determines that the continuous effect flag is ON when all of the following two conditions, Condition A and Condition B, are satisfied. It is determined that the flag is not turned on.

Condition A: In the prior determination information storage area 320c3, there is no information indicating the jackpot in the preliminary determination information (the jackpot determination information column) stored before the preliminary determination information newly stored in the process of S1305. In other words, the suspension information in the suspension information storage area 301cx before storing the pre-judgment information in the process of S1305 has no big hit.
Condition B: Winning of the prefetch lottery.

  As an example of the condition A, the preliminary determination information is not stored in the storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, while the pre-determination information is stored in the first storage area to the third storage area corresponding to the first special symbol. It is assumed that the determination information is stored and the preliminary determination information is newly stored in the fourth storage area corresponding to the first special symbol in the process of S1305 (see FIG. 11). In this case, the condition A is satisfied if there is no information indicating a big hit in the pre-judgment information (big hit judgment column) stored in the first to third storage areas corresponding to the first special symbol.

  In the prefetch lottery under the condition B, when the special symbol for preliminary determination included in the preliminary determination information newly stored in the process of S1305 is a lost symbol, the lottery is performed with the first prefetch lottery probability, and the big hit symbol In the case of, the lottery is set to be performed with the second look-ahead lottery probability having a higher winning expectation than the first look-ahead lottery probability. Thereby, in the case of a jackpot, the probability of executing the prefetching effect is set high. In other words, when the prefetching effect appears, the jackpot expectation degree is higher than when the prefetching effect does not appear.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the continuous production flag is not turned on unless all of the conditions A and B are satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the continuous effect flag may be turned on.

  If it is determined that the continuous production flag is to be turned ON, the continuous production start motion information (“○” in FIG. 11) is stored in the continuous production presence / absence information column corresponding to the storage area stored in the processing of S1305 in the preliminary determination information storage area 320c3. ) Is stored. If it is determined that the continuous production flag is not turned on, the continuous production non-activation information (“−” in FIG. 11) is stored in the continuous production presence / absence information column corresponding to the storage area stored in the process of S1305 in the preliminary determination information storage area 320c3. ") Is stored.

  The sub CPU 320a determines whether the continuous production starting motion information or the continuous production non-activation information is stored in the continuous production presence / absence information column, or when the continuous production flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is already ON, The process moves to S1315.

  When the continuous production flag is turned on and the continuous production start motion information “O” is stored in the continuous production presence / absence information column of the preliminary determination information storage area 320c3, the main display device is changed from the next special symbol change display. At 131, a continuous effect is executed. This continuous effect can be executed until the display effect is executed based on the hold information corresponding to the preliminary determination information including the continuous effect departure movement information. In this case, it may be executed even during the display effect based on the hold information corresponding to the advance determination information including the continuous effect departure motion information.

  In addition, when the continuous effect flag is set to ON in the continuous effect flag setting process and the variable display corresponding to the preliminary determination information used for the determination is completed, the sub CPU 320a executes the symbol determination process described above. Set the continuous effect flag to OFF.

  Subsequently, after the continuous effect flag setting process, the sub CPU 320a executes a pseudo consecutive effect flag setting process in the process of S1315. Specifically, when the continuous effect flag stored in sub RAM 320c is ON, sub CPU 320a sets the pseudo continuous effect flag stored in sub RAM 320c to OFF. When the continuous effect flag stored in sub RAM 320c is OFF, sub CPU 320a sets the pseudo continuous effect flag stored in sub RAM 320c to ON. After that, the pre-reading process ends, and the process returns to the command receiving process.

  In addition, in the effect pattern determination process described later, the sub CPU 320a performs the pseudo continuous effect flag setting process even if the acquired variation pattern is a variation pattern with a pseudo consecutive effect (for example, the variation pattern 7B). When the continuous effect flag is set to OFF (when the continuous effect flag is ON), the pseudo continuous effect is not executed.

[Description of effect pattern determination processing]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process. In this effect pattern determination processing, first, the sub CPU 320a determines whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 300 (S1405). If the change start command has not been received (S1405: NO), the sub CPU 320a ends the effect pattern determination processing, and returns to the command reception processing. When receiving the change start command (S1405: YES), the sub CPU 320a acquires a change pattern included in the change start command in the process of S1410.

  Next, the sub CPU 320a determines an effect pattern in the process of S1415. More specifically, the sub CPU 320a determines an effect pattern by determining a main display effect, determining a continuous effect, determining a pseudo-sequence effect, determining a reach symbol, determining a chance up, and determining a stop symbol. I do. The details will be described below.

  First, the sub CPU 320a determines an effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of S1410 as a key display effect based on the key display effect specification table TS1. For example, when the acquired fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 6B, the sub CPU 320a determines the SPSP reach (losing) production 1 that is the production corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 6B as the basic display production based on the basic display production designation table TS1. .

  Next, when the continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is ON, the sub CPU 320a determines the execution of the continuous effect. When the continuous effect flag stored in sub RAM 320c is OFF, sub CPU 320a determines non-execution of the continuous effect.

  Next, the sub CPU 320a determines whether or not the pseudo continuous production flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is ON and if the fluctuation pattern acquired in the processing of S1410 corresponds to the pseudo continuous production, Determine the execution of. For example, the sub CPU 320a executes the pseudo continuous production when the pseudo continuous production flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is ON and the variation pattern acquired in the process of S1410 is “variation pattern 4B”. To determine.

  On the other hand, when the pseudo consecutive production flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is OFF, the sub CPU 320a performs the pseudo consecutive production regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern acquired in S1410 corresponds to the pseudo consecutive production. Decide not to run. For example, when the pseudo consecutive effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is OFF, the sub CPU 320a determines whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is “variable pattern 4B” in spite of the fact that the fluctuation pattern acquired in the processing of S1410 is “variation pattern 4B”. Decide not to run.

  That is, when the continuous effect flag is ON, the pseudo continuous effect flag is OFF, and therefore, when the continuous effect is performed, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. On the other hand, when the continuous effect flag is OFF, the pseudo continuous effect flag is ON, so that the pseudo continuous effect can be executed if the variation pattern acquired in S1410 corresponds to the pseudo continuous effect.

  Next, when the acquired fluctuation pattern corresponds to the effect of executing the reach (reach formation effect), the sub CPU 320a determines the reach symbol based on the decorative symbol determination random number and the decorative symbol determination table TS2. . The sub CPU 320a skips this process when the acquired fluctuation pattern does not correspond to the effect of executing the reach (reach formation effect).

  Next, the sub CPU 320a determines whether or not to execute the above-described chance-up effect based on the obtained fluctuation pattern and the chance-up random number. Next, the sub CPU 320a determines the symbol array of the decorative symbol to be finally stopped based on the obtained fluctuation pattern and the decorative symbol determining random number.

  From the above, the sub CPU 320a determines the main display effect, the presence or absence of the continuous effect execution, the presence or absence of the pseudo consecutive effect execution, the reach symbol, the presence or absence of the chance up execution, and the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol to be finally stopped. Finally, an effect pattern for realizing a display effect, a movable object effect, a sound effect, and a light emission effect is determined.

[Configuration of Dimming / Drive System 1500 and Light Emitting System 1550]
FIG. 15 shows a dimming / driving system 1500 for controlling the driving of various accessories provided on the glass frame 150 of the gaming machine 100 and the gaming board unit 102 and dimming the LEDs using the one-line driver 1520. And a light emitting system 1550 for controlling the light emission of the LED of the display 125. Note that a system including the effect control board 320, the lamp control board 340, the frame lighting device 345, the frame driving device 346, the panel lighting device 347, and the panel driving device 348 is referred to as a dimming / driving system 1500. The system configured by the logic unit 1530 in the display 125 and the one-line driver 1520 and the LED of the display 125 is referred to as a light emitting system 1550.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the dimming / driving system 1500 drives various characters by a DATA signal and a CLOCK signal (hereinafter abbreviated as “CLK signal”) output from the sub CPU 320 a of the effect control board 320. This is a system that performs control and dimming control of LEDs. The dimming / driving system 1500 includes a logic unit 1530 in the effect control board 320. The lamp control board 340 receives two signals of a DATA signal (DATA) and a CLK signal (CLK) to perform various functions. A two-wire driver 1510 for controlling the operation of an object and a one-wire driver 1520 for inputting one signal generated from the DATA signal and the CLK signal to control the operation of various accessories are provided. The DATA signal and the CLK signal are output from the sub CPU 320a, and the two signals are directly input (in a two-wire state) to the two-wire driver 1510, whereby the two-wire driver 1510 is connected. A signal is output to the frame lighting device 345 and the frame driving device 346. The DATA signal and the CLK signal output from the sub CPU 320a are input to the logic unit 1530 and converted into one control signal, and the converted control signal is transmitted via the one-wire driver 1520 to the panel lighting device 347 and Output to the panel drive unit 348.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the light emitting system 1550 is a system that controls the light emission of the LED of the display 125 based on the DATA signal and the CLK signal output from the main CPU 301a of the main control board 300. The light emitting system 1550 includes a logic unit 1530 and a one-wire driver 1520 in the display 125. The DATA signal and the CLK signal output from the main CPU 301a are input to the logic unit 1530 and converted into one LED control signal, and the converted control signal is output to the one-wire driver 1520.

  The logic unit 1530 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the logic unit 1530. As shown in FIG. 16, the logic unit 1530 includes a first exclusive OR element 1601 (first XOR 1601), a buffer 1602, a resistor 1603, a capacitor 1604, a second exclusive OR element 1605 (second XOR 1605), and a polarity inversion element. 1606 and D-FlipFlop 1607.

  The first XOR 1601 is an element that calculates an exclusive OR from the input DATA signal and CLK signal, and outputs the result to the D terminal of the D-FlipFlop 1607. The buffer 1602, the resistor 1603, and the capacitor 1604 are used to cause a predetermined time delay in the CLK signal. That is, by connecting the buffer 1602 and the resistor 1603 in series and connecting the capacitor 1604 between the output side of the resistor 1603 and GND, a first-order lag circuit 1608 is configured to cause a delay in the CLK signal. The delay time can be set by a time constant determined by the value of the resistor 1603 and the capacitance of the capacitor 1604. The branched CLK signal is directly input to one input terminal of the second XOR 1605, and the CLK signal is input to the other input terminal via the primary delay circuit 1608. The output of the second XOR 1605 is input to the CLK input terminal of the D-FlipFlop 1607 via the polarity inversion element 1606. In the D-FlipFlop 1607, the output signal of the first XOR 1601 is input to the D terminal, the output signal of the polarity inversion element 1606 is input to the CLK terminal, and the output signal from the Q terminal is output as a control signal.

  The operation of the logic unit 1530 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a timing chart of each signal in the logic unit 1530. FIG. 17A shows a CLK signal output from the sub CPU 320a and the main CPU 301a, and FIG. 17B shows a DATA signal output from the sub CPU 320a and the main CPU 301a.

  When the CLK signal and the DATA signal are input to the first XOR 1601, the exclusive OR of the CLK signal and the DATA signal is output from the first XOR 1601 as shown in (c). That is, when the CLK signal and the DATA signal are in the same state (High and High or Low and Low), the output becomes Low, and when the CLK signal and the DATA signal are different (one is High and the other is Low). , Output becomes High. The CLK delay signal that caused the delay in the primary delay circuit 1608 is shown in FIG. Further, the CLK delay signal and the CLK signal (signal having no delay shown in (a)) shown in (d) are input to the second XOR 1605, and the signal output from the second XOR 1605 (exclusively of the CLK signal and the CLK delay signal). (E) is shown in (e). A signal obtained by inverting the polarity of the output signal from the second XOR 1605 shown in (e) by the polarity inverting element 1606 is shown in (f). Then, the signal (output signal of the first XOR 1601) shown in (c) and the signal (output signal of the polarity inversion element 1606) shown in (f) are input to the D terminal and the CLK terminal of the D-FlipFlop 1607, respectively, to obtain a Q output. The signal is shown in (g).

  As described above, by using the first XOR 1601, the second XOR 1605, the first-order delay circuit 1608, and the D-FlipFlop 1607, a delay occurs in the CLK signal and the DATA signal due to a difference in length of the transmission line, noise, and the like, and the CLK signal and the DATA signal are delayed. Even when synchronization with the clock signal is lost, a correct control signal can be generated from the CLK signal and the DATA signal.

[Description of one-wire driver 1520]
Next, details of the one-wire driver 1520 used in the dimming / driving system 1500 and the light emitting system 1550 will be described.

(Pin layout)
The appearance and terminal arrangement of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an external view, a terminal arrangement, and terminal symbols as viewed from above when the one-wire driver 1520 is realized as an integrated circuit (hereinafter, also referred to as an IC chip). As shown in FIG. 18, the one-line driver 1520 is formed by molding an IC chip into a substantially square shape as viewed from the top with resin or ceramic and forming electrode pads on four sides on the bottom surface of the QFN (Quad Flat). Non-leaded package) type.

  The function of each terminal of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a table for explaining the function of each terminal in the one-wire driver 1520 in association with each terminal symbol. As shown in FIG. 19, / OUTR0 to / OUTB2 shown in terminal numbers 1 to 6 and 22 to 24 are of an open drain type. The NC (NO-CONNECTION) terminals of the terminal numbers 18 and 20 are connected to GND or Vcc. Further, when an internal power supply is used, the VLOUT terminal is directly connected to the Vcc terminal. When power is supplied from an external power supply to Vcc, the VLOUT terminal is connected to the GND terminal.

(Functional configuration)
The functional configuration inside the one-wire driver 1520 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration inside the one-wire driver 1520. As shown in FIG. 20, the one-wire driver 1520 includes an address setting unit 2001, a logic processing unit 2002, an oscillator 2003, a buffer 2004, nine PWM (pulse width modulator) 2005, nine constant current drivers 2006, and A constant voltage regulator 2007 is provided.

  The address setting unit 2001 performs setting (address setting) to the effect that the one-wire driver 1520 has been selected by the sub CPU 320a or the main CPU 301a based on the input signals of ID0, ID1, and ID2. When the one-wire driver 1520 is selected by the address setting unit 2001, the logic processing unit 2002 converts the LED control signal from DATA-IN and outputs a control signal to each PWM 2005. The oscillator 2003 is an oscillator that supplies a signal of a predetermined frequency to the logic processing unit 2002 as a generation source of a control signal to the PWM 2005 generated by the logic processing unit 2002. The buffer 2004 is a buffer for outputting a DATA-IN signal as a DATA-OUT signal. The PWM 2005 performs pulse width modulation on the control signal from the logic processing unit 2002 and outputs the control signal to the constant current driver 2006. The constant current driver 2006 receives a pulse signal from the PWM 2005 and controls light emission or extinguishing of the LED 2008. The constant voltage regulator 2007 outputs a constant voltage of 5 V from the power supply as the power supply of the LED 2008.

(Data setting method)
The one-wire driver 1520 is a driver that performs dimming control of the LED and operation control of the movable accessory by a data signal (DATA signal) transmitted by one wire. For reference, FIG. 21 shows a comparison with a conventional two-wire driver that synchronizes two signals of a clock signal and a data signal and performs dimming control of an LED and operation control of a movable accessory.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the one-wire driver 1520, the state of each data is assigned to a state transition (H → L, L → H) for a conventional two-wire data signal. The data setting of the one-wire driver 1520 is set to either the “basic mode” or the “special mode” in the following “data setting format”.

(Data setting format)
The data setting format will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a format of data setting of each command input to the one-line driver 1520. The data setting of each command input to DATA-IN is set according to the format shown in FIG. Specifically, they are “start command”, “slave address”, “sub address”, “data byte”, and “period command”.

In the start command, a command frequency indicating a 1-bit data width is recognized by fetching a start command indicating a data input start condition described below.
〇Start command: 10101010101101010 = 0xAAA (original binary value: 11111111: see FIG. 22B)
Since the one-wire driver 1520 continuously recognizes the cycle of the signal recognized by the start command until the period command (command indicating the end of data) shown below, the cycle of the signal from the start command to the end of the input of the period command is determined. It is necessary to input the pulse width within one bit within a duty of 50% so as not to collapse.
@Period command: 1001100110011001 = 0x9556 (original binary value: 10000001: see FIG. 22C)
In the case of continuously inputting data, it is necessary to set an interval period (“L input” in FIG. 22A) of 10 μS or more after the completion of the period command input and until the next start command is input.

(Input mode)
The input mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a diagram showing data contents set in the basic input mode. As shown in FIG. 23A, in the basic input mode, data is configured in the order of a start command, a slave address, a subaddress, a data byte, and a period command. Then, the data of this configuration is received at intervals of 10 μS. The slave address is the ID setting of the one-wire driver 1520, the sub address is the output channel setting, and the data byte is the data for PWM setting.

(Special input mode)
FIGS. 23B and 23C are diagrams showing data contents set in the special input mode. The special input mode is an input mode used when all outputs are individually set.
(1) In the case of individually setting all outputs As shown in FIG. 23B, when the following special mode data is set in the sub-address, the lighting data of all outputs can be set.
〇Special mode setting data: 01101001010101 = 0x9955 (original binary value: 011000000)
In this case, it is necessary to input data for 9 channels, and if more than 9 channels are input, the data after 10 channels will be invalid.
(2) Setting Channel to Output As shown in FIG. 23 (c), when a channel is set in the sub address, lighting data of the set channel can be set.

(Data setting)
(1) Slave Address The setting of the slave will be described based on FIGS. 24-1 and 24-2. The potentials and logics input to the terminals ID0, ID1, and ID2 are defined as shown in FIGS. 24-1 and 24-2. However, the upper bit is “0”, and the lower bit is “0” except for all selections. Also, it is assumed that Vcc = "1010" = 0xA, open = "1001" = 0x9, Rext-R / G / B (*) = "0110" = 0x6, and GND = "0101" = 0x5.

(2) Sub-address The setting of the sub-address will be described with reference to FIG. In the sub address, output channel setting / all channel setting / special mode setting can be set. FIG. 25 shows the “channel setting command”, the “original binary value”, and the channel setting in the sub address setting. In the output channel setting, a channel defining the PWM setting is set, and in the all channel setting, the same PWM is set for all the channels. The special mode is a mode in which all channels are individually set.

(3) Data byte (PWM setting)
The setting of the data byte will be described with reference to FIG. The data byte sets the PWM dimming. PWM dimming is a control method for controlling (dimming) the magnitude of light emitted from an LED based on the magnitude of a pulse width output to the LED. FIG. 26 shows the “PWM setting command”, “original binary value”, and PWM dimming values in the data byte. The PWM dimming is indicated by a ratio when the value at full output is set to 127.

(4) Notes on Data Setting Notes on data setting of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. The one-wire driver 1520 has a specification of identifying / processing data only by a data signal (asynchronous input signal). Therefore, the data cycle (communication speed) is read and learned by the start command (data input start condition). Then, data is identified based on the learned cycle, and the learned cycle is reset by a period command (data input termination condition). Therefore, for example, data is recognized when the period from the start command to the period command is disrupted due to the disturbance of the waveform due to the disturbance of the waveform at the time of applying noise or the periodicity caused by the sub CPU 320a that occurs when the output processing of the C lamp PU 150a cannot be performed in time. do not do. Specifically, it is shown in the following (a) and (b).

(A) Learning of data period FIG. 27A shows the specification of learning of the data period. As shown in FIG. 27A, the interval between data requires 10 μS or more. In the first start command (indicated by “A” in FIG. 27A), the data cycle / phase is learned during the period of the start command. In the subsequent slave address, special mode setting, and lighting data setting (indicated by “B” in FIG. 27A), data is recognized based on the cycle / phase learned by the start command. In the last period command (indicated by “C” in FIG. 27A), the learned period / phase is reset. In addition, between the start command and the period command (indicated by “D” in FIG. 27A), the disturbance of the waveform when noise is applied or the periodicity caused by the sub CPU 320a or the like (the output processing of the sub CPU 320a is delayed). For example, the data cannot be recognized if the period / phase of the data changes. Therefore, care must be taken so that the period / phase does not change.

(B) Data Recognition FIG. 27B shows the duty ratio of a signal input to the one-wire driver 1520. As shown in FIG. 27B, the duty ratio of the High / Low pulse width needs to be within ± 10%. If it does not fall within this range, data cannot be correctly recognized (provided that the modulation period is 100%). In other words, the data is not recognized unless the polarity of the data is inverted when the duty ratio is ± 10% or more.

(Example of control data input)
An example of inputting control data will be described with reference to FIGS.
(1) Example of basic data input to the same ID (a) When data A is input before the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 127 (pattern 1)
FIG. 28A shows how the signal changes in this case. As shown in FIG. 28A, in the case of the pattern 1, the output of the data A starts at the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 0. In this case, the input invalid period in which the input is invalid from the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 127 to the immediately following rising edge of the internal PWM clock 0.

(B) When data A is input after the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 127 (pattern 2)
FIG. 28B shows how the signal changes in this case. As shown in FIG. 28B, in the case of the pattern 2, the output of the data A is not started at the 0 rising edge of the internal PWM clock immediately after the input of the data A, and the next rising of the internal PWM clock 0 is performed. Output of data A is started at the edge. In this case, after the period of data A is input, the input is invalid until the next rising edge of the internal PWM clock 0.

(C) When data B is input after outputting pattern 1 (pattern 3)
FIG. 28 (c) shows how signals change when data B is input after pattern 1 is output. As shown in FIG. 28C, in the case of the pattern 3, the output of the data A starts at the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 0 immediately after the input of the data A, and the next (the data B is input). The output of the data B is started at the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 0 (immediately after). From the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 127 immediately after the input of the data B to the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 0 immediately after the input of the data B and the rising edge of the internal clock 0 immediately after the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 127 immediately after the input of the data B The input invalid period extends to the edge.

(D) When data B is input before output of pattern 2 is started (pattern 4)
FIG. 29A shows how the signal changes when data B is input before the output of pattern 2 is started. In the case of the pattern 4, after the data A (period) is inputted, the input B is invalid until the second rising edge of the internal PWM clock 0, so that the data B is invalidated and the data A is output. .

(E) When the period command is missed (pattern 5)
FIG. 29B shows how the signal changes when the period command is missed. In the case of the pattern 5, the output of the data A is not started at the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 0 immediately after the input of the data A, and the output of the next internal PWM clock 0 (immediately after the input of the data B) is performed. Output of data B is started at the rising edge.

(2) Example of basic data input to another ID (a) When data B is input to slave = 02H immediately after input of data A to slave = 00H (pattern 6)
FIG. 30 shows how signals change when data B is input to slave = 02H immediately after data A is input to slave = 00H. In the case of the pattern 6, as the output, both the data A and the data B are output at the rising edge of the internal PWM clock 0 immediately after the input of the data A and the data B.

(3) When not operating as set (a) Pattern 7
FIG. 31A shows a signal change when a period command is missed or omitted after inputting data A to slave = 00H, and when a period command is missed or omitted after inputting data B to slave = 02H. . In the case of pattern 7, data A is output, but data B is not output.
(B) Pattern 8
FIG. 31B shows a change in a signal when a start command is input after data B of pattern 7 is input. In the case of pattern 8, data A is output, but data B is not output.

(Power supply function)
The power setting of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. The one-wire driver 1520 can be set to the following two power settings (1) and (2).
(1) When sharing with LED power supply FIG. 32A shows a circuit configuration when sharing the LED power supply with the one-wire driver 1520. As shown in FIG. 32A, when sharing the power supply with the LED power supply, the power supply (7.0 to 28 V) is input to the VL terminal, and the VLOUT is directly connected to the Vcc terminal. The VLOUT terminal output (5 V) can be connected to only one logic IC except that it is connected to Vcc (it cannot be connected to a plurality of logic ICs or other drivers).
(2) When 5 V is Directly Input to Vcc Terminal FIG. 32B shows a circuit configuration when a 5 V power supply is directly input to the Vcc terminal of the one-wire driver 1520. As shown in FIG. 32B, when 5 V is directly applied to the one-wire driver 1520 without using the internal power supply, the VL and VOUT terminals are connected to GND.

When a power supply is connected according to the above (1) and (2), a decoupling capacitor is added between the VL terminal and the Vcc terminal and GND. The recommended performance values for the decoupling capacitor are as follows.
・ Between VL (LED power supply) terminal and GND: 1μF electrolytic capacitor ・ Vcc (5V power supply) and GND can: 1μF electrolytic capacitor and 0.1μF ceramic capacitor The decoupling capacitors to be selected are VL terminal-GND In this case, the performance of the main power supply, and in the case of the Vcc terminal and GND, depend on the LED current to be set and the amount of VLOUT supply current, and may be changed as appropriate.

(Cascade connection (data buffer function))
A case where the one-wire driver 1520 is cascaded will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 shows a configuration in which a plurality of one-wire drivers 1520 are cascaded. Since a buffer is incorporated between DATA-IN and DATA-OUT of the one-wire driver 1520, a plurality of one-wire drivers 1520 can be cascaded as shown in FIG. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 33, in the case of cascade connection, it is necessary to make the number within five on the same substrate.

(Power-on reset operation)
The power-on reset (POR: Power On Reset) function of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 shows a Vcc waveform at the time of POR of the one-wire driver 1520. The POR function is designed to prevent malfunction by resetting all internal data at power-on and setting a default setting. As shown in FIG. 34, the POR function operates only when Vcc rises from 0V, and the reset is completed when Vcc falls from 0V to 2V. The lower limit voltage (data holding lower limit voltage) for the one-wire driver 1520 to hold data is 1.8 V. When Vcc falls below this voltage, data is not held. To restart after POR, it is necessary to make Vcc = 0V. In order to hold the internal data, it is guaranteed after the Vcc voltage once reaches 4.5 V or more.

(Thermal shutdown function)
Next, the thermal shutdown function of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described. When the internal temperature reaches the thermal shutdown operating temperature shown in (1) below, the one-wire driver 1520 activates the thermal shutdown circuit and turns off all constant current power supplies. When the internal temperature decreases and reaches the thermal shutdown release temperature shown in (2) below, the constant current output operation is restarted.
(1) Thermal shutdown operating temperature: 150 to 180 ° C
(2) Thermal shutdown release temperature: -20 ° C from thermal shutdown operating temperature

(Other notes)
(1) LED Drive Current Setting External Resistors (Rext-R, Rext-G, Rext-B) Next, the LED drive current setting external resistors will be described. External resistors connected to the Rext-R, Rext-G, and Rext-B terminals of the one-wire driver 1520 need to be separately connected. When the three external resistors connected to the terminals Rext-R, Rext-G, and Rext-B are shared (that is, they are made one), each of Rext-R, Rext-G, and Rext-B becomes Therefore, it is necessary to avoid such a configuration since a current error occurs.
(2) ID setting operation sequence An ID setting sequence of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 shows a change in Vcc during the ID setting operation. As shown in FIG. 35, when the power is turned on, the ID can be set while Vcc is lower than 4.5 V from the time when it exceeds 4.5 V (time indicated by “A” in FIG. 35). At other times (sections indicated by “B” in FIG. 35), the ID cannot be set. However, in order to prevent malfunction during ID setting, a transient input signal of less than two clock periods of external input data ((DATA-IN)) is not accepted.
(3) Data setting In the special mode, it is necessary to always input data for 9 channels as the gradation signal. If more than 9 channels are input, the channels after 10 are invalid. If the number of channels is less than 9, the data is updated up to the channel to which data has been input, and the previous channels are retained for channels that have not been input.
(4) Data setting timing When inputting data to the same slave address, data input may not be accepted unless an interval of 3 mS (128 internal PWM clocks) or more is provided. Therefore, an interval of 3 mS or more after period input is provided. You need to enter the following data. When data is input to another slave address, an interval of 3 mS (128 internal PWM clocks) or more is unnecessary.
(5) Decoupling Capacitor It is desirable to add a capacitor near the power input terminal of the one-wire driver 1520 for stabilizing the power system.

(State transition)
The state transition when the one-wire driver 1520 operates will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a state transition when the VL terminal is used when the one-wire driver 1520 operates, and FIG. 37 shows a state transition when the VL terminal is not used when the one-wire driver 1520 operates. It is a flowchart shown.

(1) When Using the VL Terminal In this case, the VLOUT terminal and the Vcc terminal are connected in advance, and the IDs (ID0 to ID2 terminals) of the individual 1-wire driver 1520 are set in advance.
As shown in FIG. 36, when the main power is turned on (S3600), the VLOUT terminal supplies the operating voltage (S3605). Then, when the VLOUT terminal voltage becomes 4.5 V or more (S3610), the ID is recognized (S3615). Here, data input is performed after 15 ms (minimum) or more has elapsed after Vcc voltage ≧ 4.5 V or more. When the ID is recognized, the mode is set to the normal mode (S3620). Therefore, the data of each output is updated for each ID set by the DATA signal, and the dimming control of the LED is performed. If the temperature of the one-wire driver 1520 becomes equal to or higher than the thermal shutdown detection temperature during LED dimming control, a thermal shutdown mode is set (S3625), and all LED outputs are forcibly turned off. At this time, the internal data of the one-wire driver 1520 is held. When the temperature becomes equal to or lower than the thermal shutdown detection temperature, the mode returns to the normal mode (S3620) and the dimming control of the LED is restarted.
(2) When the VL terminal is not used In this case, the VLOUT terminal and the VL terminal are connected to GND in advance, and the IDs (ID0 to ID2) of the individual 1-wire driver 1520 are set in advance.
As shown in FIG. 37, when the operating power is turned on (S3700), the Vcc terminal voltage becomes 4.5 V or more (S3705). The following (S3710 to S3720) is a state transition similar to the case where the VL terminal shown in FIG. 36 is used.

(Absolute maximum rating)
The absolute maximum rating of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 shows the absolute maximum rating of the one-wire driver 1520 at an ambient temperature (Ta) of 25 ° C. In FIG. 38, it is necessary that the maximum value of the input voltage VIN does not exceed 6.0 V. The allowable loss Pd and the saturation thermal resistance Rth (ja) are values when mounted on a board. The substrate conditions are 76.2 mm × 114.3 mm × 1.6 mm, Cu = 30%, 35 μm thickness, SEMI compliant, 2-Layer. The allowable loss Pd is a value obtained by subtracting the reciprocal (1 / Rth (ja)) of the saturated thermal resistance value every time the ambient temperature Ta exceeds 25 ° C. by 1 ° C. The output current IOUT may be further limited by the ambient temperature Ta or substrate conditions. It is necessary to design the maximum value of the maximum junction temperature Tj in consideration of the usage loss with a target of 120 ° C.

(Package power dissipation)
The permissible loss characteristics of the package of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 shows the package allowable loss characteristics of the one-wire driver 1520. In FIG. 39, the vertical axis (Y axis) is the allowable loss Pd [W], and the horizontal axis (X axis) is the operating temperature range Topr [° C.]. As shown in FIG. 39, when the operating temperature range Topr is 0 [° C.] to 25 [° C.], the maximum allowable loss is 2.4 [W], and when the operating temperature range Topr is 25 [° C.] to 85 [° C.], , The maximum permissible loss is reduced according to a linear function represented by Y = −0.0192Y + 2.88, and 85 [° C.] is the maximum operating temperature.

(Operating conditions)
The operating conditions of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 shows operating conditions of the one-wire driver 1520. One-wire driver 1520 operates under the operating conditions shown in FIG. 40 at ambient temperature Ta = −40 to 85 ° C.

(Electrical characteristics)
The electrical characteristics of the one-wire driver 1520 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41 is a table for describing the electrical characteristics of the one-wire driver 1520, and FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating the electrical characteristics of the one-wire driver 1520. The one-wire driver 1520 has the electrical characteristics shown in FIG. 42 under the conditions of an ambient temperature Ta = 25 ° C., an LED power supply VL = 15 V, and an operation power supply Vcc = VLOUT. FIG. 41 shows the definition of each symbol in DATA-IN and DATA-OUT.

[Features of dimming / driving system 1500 and light emitting system 1550]
In the dimming / driving system 1500 in the above-described embodiment, the logic unit 1530 generates one control signal from the DATA signal and the CLK signal, and the one-wire driver 1520 converts the one control signal generated by the logic unit 1530 into one control signal. The panel lighting device 347 and the panel driving device 348 can be operated based on the information. That is, in the dimming / driving system 1500, the one-line driver 1520 can dimming the LEDs (lamps) of the plurality of movable objects provided in the game board unit 120 that is the board lighting device 347. The LED (decorative lamp) of a plurality of accessories provided on the glass frame 150 which is the frame lighting device 345 can be controlled by the two-wire driver 1510. In addition, the one-line driver 1520 can control the driving of a plurality of movable members provided in the game board unit 120 which is the board driving device 348, and the two-wire driver 1510 can drive the frame driving device 346. It is possible to control the driving of a plurality of accessories provided on the glass frame 150.

  That is, the LED of the game board unit 120 is controlled by the one-wire driver 1520 and the movable role is controlled, and the LEDs of the glass frame 150, the outer frame 160, and the inner frame 170 are controlled by the two-wire driver 1510. It is possible to mix the one-wire driver 1520 and the two-wire driver 1510 in the gaming machine 100 by controlling the light and the movable role. In this way, by mixing the one-wire driver 1520 and the two-wire driver 1510, for example, in a gaming machine in which the game board unit and the glass frame 150 and the like both use the two-wire driver 1510 conventionally, A new game board unit using the one-wire driver 1520 can be replaced with a conventional game board unit (using the two-wire driver 1510). In this case, the game board unit can be replaced without changing the software executed by the sub CPU 320a. Furthermore, if the dimming / driving system 1500 is used, the number of components in the control signal transmission path can be reduced, and the space required for the transmission path can be reduced, so that the dimming / drive system 1500 can be installed on a component that has been difficult to install. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, so that the possibility of breakdown is reduced, leading to a reduction in the game interruption time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the light emitting system 1550 in the above embodiment, the logic unit 1530 of the display 125 generates one control signal from the DATA signal and the CLK signal, and the one-wire driver 1520 generates one control signal generated by the logic unit 1530. The light emission of the display LED can be controlled based on By using such a light emitting system 1550, a one-wire driver 1520 and a two-wire driver 1510 can be mixed in the gaming machine 100, as in the dimming / driving system 1500 described above. Also, it is possible to reduce the number of components in the control signal transmission path compared to the conventional one, or to reduce the space required for the transmission path by installing it on parts that were difficult to install in the past, and to reduce the number of parts. It is possible.

  In the logic unit 1530 in the above embodiment, the first XOR 1601 generates the signal (c) by the exclusive OR of the CLK signal and the DATA signal, and the primary delay circuit 1608 generates the CLK delay signal (d) generated from the CLK signal. ) And the CLK signal (a) to generate a signal (e) by exclusive OR at the second XOR 1605, and the signal (c) generated at the first XOR 1601 and the signal (e) generated at the second XOR 1605 , A control signal (g) can be generated by the D-FlipFlop 1607. In the dimming / driving system 1500 and the light emitting system 1550 using such a logic unit 1530, a delay occurs in the CLK signal and the DATA signal due to a difference in transmission line length, noise, and the like, and the CLK signal and the DATA signal are delayed. Even when synchronization with the clock signal is lost, a correct LED control signal can be generated from the CLK signal and the DATA signal, and various controls can be appropriately performed.

(2nd Embodiment)
FIG. 43 shows a configuration of a dimming / driving system 4300 according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the configuration is the same as that of the dimming / driving system 1500 of the first embodiment except for the configurations of the effect control board 4320 and the lamp control board 4340. Therefore, the same members are denoted by the same reference numerals. The description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dimming / driving system 4300 includes a lamp CPU 4350 that performs arithmetic processing on the lamp control board 4340, and a logic unit 1530. The lamp CPU 4350 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp / drive control program stored in the ROM provided on the lamp control board 4340, and uses the RAM provided on the lamp control board 4340 as a work area. This is for performing arithmetic processing relating to the effect. The lamp CPU 4350 is connected to the sub CPU 320a of the effect control board 4320, and performs a predetermined effect on a controlled device such as various lighting devices or various driving devices in response to an effect instruction command or the like received from the sub CPU 320a. Output data and commands for That is, the dimming / driving system 4300 is a system that controls the driving of various accessories and the dimming control of the LEDs by the DATA signal and the CLK signal output from the lamp CPU 4350 in response to the command output from the sub CPU 320a. .

  Thus, in the dimming / driving system 4300 of the second embodiment, the lamp CPU 4350, the logic unit 1530, the two-wire driver 1510, and the one-wire driver 1520 are provided on the lamp control board 4340. Therefore, with such a dimming / driving system 4300, although the lamp control board is replaced with a lamp control board 4340 having a different configuration from the conventional one, the effect control board and the like can be used as they are, The drive control of various accessories of the game board unit 102 by the one-wire driver 1520 and the dimming of the LED can be performed.

(Third embodiment)
A light control / drive system 4400 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the dimming / driving system 4400 according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of an exclusive OR calculation process executed by the lamp CPU 4450. Note that the third embodiment is the same as the dimming / driving system 4300 of the second embodiment except for the configuration of the lamp control board 4440, and thus the same members are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted. .

  As shown in FIG. 44, in the dimming / driving system 4400 of the third embodiment, in the dimming / driving system 4300 (see FIG. 43) of the second embodiment, the function of the logic unit 1530, that is, the exclusion of DATA and CLK. The logical OR is generated by software processing executed inside the lamp CPU 4450, and the result is output from a DATA terminal (a DATA terminal different from the DATA terminal of the first embodiment) as a control signal. That is, the logic unit 1530 is omitted, and the function is assigned to the lamp CPU 4450.

  As shown in FIG. 45, specifically, the lamp CPU 4450 inputs CLK in S4500, and inputs DATA in subsequent S4505. Then, in S4510, the exclusive OR of CLK and DATA input in S4500 and S4505 is calculated, and in S4515, the exclusive OR of CLK and DATA calculated in S4510 is output to the DATA terminal as a control signal. Then, after outputting the control signal to the DATA terminal, the process returns to S4500 to continue the process.

  As described above, in the dimming / driving system 4400 of the third embodiment, the exclusive OR of DATA and CLK is performed by software processing inside the lamp CPU 4450, so that the logic unit 1530 becomes unnecessary. Therefore, in the dimming / driving system 4400 according to the third embodiment, for example, if there is an unused terminal among a plurality of DATA terminals of the lamp CPU 4450, only wiring to the DATA terminal is required. The drive control of various accessories of the game board unit 102 by the one-wire driver 1520 and the dimming of the LED can be performed.

(Fourth embodiment)
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a dimming / driving system 4600 when a plurality of one-wire drivers 1520 and a plurality of two-wire drivers 1510 are connected in multiple stages (cascade connection). In the fourth embodiment, the dimming / driving system 1500 according to the first embodiment and the dimming according to the second embodiment, except that a plurality of one-wire drivers 1520 and a plurality of two-wire drivers 1510 are connected in multiple stages. Since the configuration is the same as that of the drive system 4300, the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 46, in the dimming / driving system 4600 according to the fourth embodiment, the one-line drivers 1520a to 1520d receive an LED control signal output by the logic unit 1530 and output the input LED control as it is. The two-wire drivers 1510a to 1510d receive the DATA signal and the CLK signal output from the sub CPU 320a, and output the input DATA signal and CLK signal as they are. In the dimming / driving system 4600, the DATA signal and the CLK signal output from the sub CPU 320a are input to the two-wire driver 1510a, and the DATA signal and the CLK signal are output from the two-wire driver 1510b. Input to driver 1510b. Further, multi-stage connection is sequentially performed from the two-wire driver 1510a to the two-wire drivers 1510c and 1510d. The DATA signal and the CLK signal output from the sub CPU 320a are input to the logic unit 1530, and the logic unit 1530 converts the DATA signal and the CLK signal into an LED control signal, which is a serial signal, and outputs the LED control signal to the one-wire driver 1520a. The LED control signal output from the one-wire driver 1520a is input to the one-wire driver 1520b, and the LED control signals output from the one-wire driver 1530b are sequentially connected to the one-wire drivers 1520c and 1520d in multiple stages.

  According to the gaming machine including the dimming / driving system 4600 of the fourth embodiment, the accessory controlled by the predetermined signal, the first signal (DATA signal) for operating the accessory, and the Generating a third signal (LED control signal) from the two signals (CLK signal) and receiving the third signal from the control means capable of transmitting the third signal; Actuation means for actuating the accessory on the basis of the third signal, the actuation means being capable of receiving the third signal and outputting the third signal to another actuation means connected to a subsequent stage. The control means can be configured to be able to transmit the third signal to the operating means connected in multiple stages. In the gaming machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment, even if the plurality of one-wire drivers 1520 and the plurality of two-wire drivers 1510 are connected in multiple stages (cascade connection), the first to third embodiments are used. The same effects as those of the dimming / driving system can be obtained.

(Fifth embodiment)
A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the dimming / driving systems 1500, 4300, and 4400 are applied to the game board unit 102. FIG. 47 is an external view showing a schematic arrangement of decoration units around the game area.

  As shown in FIG. 47, in the gaming board unit 102 in the fifth embodiment, a right-hand lens portion 4721a covering the outer periphery of the right side above the lower edge of the game area 4701 and a left-hand lens portion 4740a covering the outer periphery of the left side. By appropriately emitting LEDs 4722a, 4723a, 4744a, and 4746a corresponding to each of the above, a plurality of light emitting decorations can be performed substantially concentrically so as to surround the game area 4701. In the glass frame 150, the LEDs 4723b and 4746b corresponding to the right radiation lens portion 4721b covering the outer periphery of the right side and the left radiation lens portion 4740b covering the outer periphery of the left side respectively include a right peripheral lens portion 4721a and a left peripheral lens portion 4740a. Are arranged so as to extend radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 4701 so as to be divided in the circumferential direction. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 4723b and 4746b of the left and right radiating lens portions 4721b and 4740b, the outside of the game area 4701 can be radially illuminated and decorated. In addition, the right peripheral lens portion 4721a and the left peripheral lens portion 4740b form a ring. The luminous decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in the glass frame 150, the LED 4756a corresponding to the center lens 4754 decorating the upper center of the game area 4701 illuminates and decorates the upper center of the game area 4701. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 4756a, the upper center of the game area 4701 can be light-emission-decorated, and in addition, a light-emission decoration serving as a reference point of a ring-shaped light-emission decoration by the right peripheral lens portion 4721a and the left peripheral lens portion 4740a. It can be made to be. The LEDs 4756b arranged on both sides of the center lens 4752 make the left and right sides of the center lens 4752 emit light decoration. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 4756b, the boundaries between the right peripheral lens portion 4721a and the left peripheral lens portion 4740a and the central lens 4754 can be luminously decorated, or the luminous decoration can be formed in a V-shape above (including the upper portion of) the game area 4701. And so on.

  In the glass frame 150, the LEDs 4764a and 4765a corresponding to the light guide portion 4773a of the upper plate front decoration member (not shown) in the plate unit 4760 for decorating the lower side of the game area 4701 are connected to the right peripheral lens portion 4721a and the left lens portion 4721a. The outer periphery of the lower side of the game area 4701 is decorated with light emission so as to connect the lower ends of the peripheral lens portion 74740a. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 4764a and 4765a, the lower edge of the game area 4701 and the front edge of the upper plate can be illuminated and decorated. The LEDs 4722a, 4723a, 4744a, By interlocking with 4746a, the entire outer periphery of the game area 4701 can be illuminated in a ring shape. In the glass frame 150, the LEDs 4773b and 4774d corresponding to the dial operation unit 4770 and the pressing operation unit 4772 of the operation unit 4770 arranged at the lower center of the game area 4701 and in the upper center of the plate unit 4760, operate the operation unit 4770. Let the luminous decoration. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 4773b and 4774d, the dial operation part 4771 and the pressing operation part 4772 can be decorated with light emission, and the player can be notified of the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation part 4771 and the pressing operation part 4772. Is available.

  By the way, in the glass frame 150, as described above, the LEDs 4722a, 4723a, 4744a, 4746a, 4756a, 4765a, 4765a, and 4774d are full-color LEDs, and three independent RGB systems are further provided for full-color light emission. Have. The LEDs 4756b and 4773b are high-brightness white LEDs and require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Therefore, two systems are connected to each other. The LEDs 4723b and 4746b are white LEDs having normal luminance.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, the gaming machine has a gaming area in which a game ball flows down and a plurality of first light emitters, and a plurality of the first light emitting bodies are arranged along an outer periphery of the gaming area, and according to a gaming state. A first light emitting unit capable of emitting light, and a plurality of second light emitting units having a plurality of second light emitting bodies, the plurality of second light emitting units being arranged along an outer periphery of the game area and capable of emitting light in accordance with a game state; The one light-emitting unit is configured so that, among the plurality of first light-emitting members, those arranged along the outer periphery of the game area are numerous, and the second light-emitting unit is configured to include the plurality of second light-emitting members. Among them, a large number may be arranged substantially radially with respect to the outer periphery of the game area. That is, in the light emission control of the glass frame 150, the lighting and blinking are controlled by dynamic lighting for each of the LEDs 4722a, 4723a, 4723b, 4744a, 4746a, 4746b, 4756a, 4756b, 4765a, 4765a, 4773b, and 4774d. , Gradation (color and brightness) are controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). With such a gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, it is possible to perform an expressive light-emitting effect.

  In addition, as a light emission effect in the glass frame 150, for example, light is sequentially emitted from the right peripheral lens portion 4721a to the left peripheral lens portion 4740a (the same color or a similar color is sequentially emitted) to rotate around the game area 4701. The game area 4701 is expanded from the inside to the outside by causing the right emission lens unit 4721b and the left emission lens unit 4740b to emit light from the inside to the outside (same color or similar color is sequentially emitted). By emitting light in the reverse order, a light emission effect converging from the outside to the inside, or simultaneous emission of the right peripheral lens portion 4721a and the left peripheral lens portion 4740a and the right radiation lens portion 4721b and the left radiation lens portion 4740b. It is possible to perform a light emission effect such that the entire outer periphery of the game area 4701 emits light widely. It has become way.

  Further, the LEDs 4722a, 4744a, 4723a, 4724a, 4723a of the right peripheral lens portion 4721a, the left peripheral lens portion 4740a, the right radiation lens portion 4721b, the left radiation lens portion 4740b, and the light guide portion 4773a of the upper plate front decoration member (not shown). By appropriately emitting light from 4746b, 4764a, and 4765a, a light emission effect such that light orbits around the outer periphery of the game area 4701, or light moves toward the center lens 4754 along the outer periphery of the game area 4701 can be obtained. Alternatively, a light emission effect such that light from the center lens 4752 moves along the outer periphery of the game area 4701 can be provided.

  Then, by emitting light only from the right radiation lens portion 4721b and the left radiation lens portion 4740b, a light emission effect of emitting light radially around the game area 4701 can be performed. By emitting light from the lens portion 4721a, the left peripheral lens portion 4740a, and the light guide portion 4763a of the upper plate front decoration member (not shown), a light emitting effect of emitting light substantially uniformly over the entire outer periphery of the game area 4701, or Light emission (lighting / flashing) of the right radiation lens portion 4721b and the left radiation lens portion 4740b during the light emission of the peripheral lens portion 4721a and the left peripheral lens portion 4740a provides a light emission effect for giving an accent to the annular light emission decoration. Or you can. In addition, by causing the right and left radiation lens portions 4721b and 4740b and the LEDs 4723b and 4746b to emit light, respectively, a light emission effect in which the radiation lens portions 4721b and 4740b rotate can be provided.

  Furthermore, the light emission effect in which the entire central lens 4756 emits light by simultaneously illuminating the LEDs 4756a and 4756b of the central lens 4756, and the light emission effect in which light rotates in the central lens 4756 by sequentially illuminating the LEDs 4756a and 4756b. It can be carried out. Also, the central lens 4752 is illuminated with high brightness to indicate the arrival of a chance or a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state, a probable change game state, a time saving game state, a probable change time short game state, etc.) to the player. Lighting effect can be performed.

  Furthermore, the LEDs 4764a and 4765a of the light guide portion 4763a of the upper plate front decorative member (not shown) emit light as appropriate to provide a light emitting effect of emitting and decorating the front edge of the upper plate, and a dial operating portion of the operation unit 4770. By emitting light in association with the LEDs 4773b and 4774d corresponding to the 4771 and the pressing operation unit 4772, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the dial operation unit 4771 and the pressing operation unit 4772. In addition, by appropriately emitting light from the LED 4773b corresponding to the dial operation unit 4771, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the dial operation unit 4771 and guides the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 4771. Further, by causing the LED 4774d corresponding to the pressing operation unit 4772 to emit light, a light emission effect for prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 4772 can be provided.

(Sixth embodiment)
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the dimming / driving systems 1500, 4300, and 4400 are applied to the game board unit 102.

  The main RAM 301c has a backup area 301cp in addition to a memory for temporarily storing various data. The backup area 301cp stores the value of the stack pointer and various data at the time of power shutdown (including power shutdown by operating a power switch (not shown). The same applies hereinafter) when the power is shut down due to a power failure or the like. When power is turned off (including power-on by operating a power switch (not shown); the same applies hereinafter), the state of the gaming machine 100 is changed to a state before power-off based on information in the backup area 301cp. It is possible to return. The writing to the backup area 301cp is executed when the power is turned off by the power restoration process, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 301cp is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

  The power supply board 360 is provided with a backup capacitor 360a. Power is supplied from the power supply board 360 to the backup capacitor 360a, and the power is stored in the backup capacitor 360a when the power of the gaming machine 100 is ON. The backup capacitor 360a is connected to the above-mentioned wiring 360b. Therefore, when the power of the gaming machine 100 is in the OFF state, the power is discharged from the backup capacitor 360a and the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 301c (backup area 301cp). Therefore, even if the power of the gaming machine 100 is turned off, the data stored in the main RAM 301c (the backup area 301cp) is retained without being erased while the power is supplied from the backup capacitor 360a. Incidentally, the capacity of the backup capacitor 360a is relatively large, and the information stored in the main RAM 301c before the power is turned off is retained for a predetermined period (for example, one or two days).

  Normally, power to the main CPU 301a of the main control board 300 is supplied via a power supply board 360 supplied with power from an external power supply. Therefore, when the power switch is turned off or the external power is shut off, power is not supplied to the main CPU 301a of the main control board 300. In this case, the main CPU 301a stops functioning, but power is supplied to the main RAM 301c from the backup capacitor 360a, and various data can be stored and held in the main RAM 301c. On the other hand, even when power is supplied from the backup capacitor 360a to the main RAM 301c when the external power supply is cut off, the power supply to the main RAM 301c is cut off when the wiring 360b is disconnected. Therefore, the winning information and the like stored in the main RAM 301c are erased, and an illegal act cannot be performed.

  According to the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the main control means for controlling the game, the main storage means provided in the main control means and storing information necessary for controlling the game, and the main control means A sub-control means for controlling a game based on information from the sub-control means; a sub-storage means provided in the sub-control means for storing information necessary for controlling the game; and a main control means connected to an external power supply. And a main power supply for supplying power to the sub-control means via the sub-wiring and at least the main storage when power supply from the external power supply to the main power supply is stopped. Means for supplying power to the means, when the power supply from the external power supply to the main power supply is stopped, and when the power supply from the main power supply to the main control means via the main wiring is stopped, At least the main storage A sub-power supply is not performed the power supply to the stage, it can be configured as comprising a. Further, in the gaming machine having such a configuration, when the power supply from the external power supply to the main power supply is stopped, the sub-power supply supplies at least power to the sub-storage means, and the main power supply from the external power supply. When the power supply to the power supply is stopped and when the power supply from the main power supply to the sub control means via the sub wiring is stopped, at least the power supply to the sub storage means is not performed. You can also.

[Description of Seventh Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a seventh embodiment which is an example of the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the gaming machine 1 (pachinko machine) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the following description, a direction toward one side of the game board unit 12 shown in FIG. A direction toward the player on the other side of the game board unit 12 is defined as a front direction of the gaming machine 1. In addition, the rightward, leftward, upward, and downward directions on the paper in the rear view of the game board unit 12 illustrated in FIG. 50 are defined as the rightward, leftward, upward, and downward directions of the gaming machine 1, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes an outer frame 10, a game board unit 12, and an inner frame 14. The outer frame 10 is directly attached to an island installed in the game arcade. The outer frame 10 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in which the vertical direction is longer than the horizontal direction. The game board unit 12 and the inner frame 14 are rotatably supported in the vicinity of one vertical side of the outer frame 10 with respect to the outer frame 10.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the game board unit 12 mainly includes a base frame 121, a game board 122, an image display device 123, a lamp relay board (not shown), and a back cover 124. I have.

  The game board unit 12 is rotatably attached to the outer frame 10 by the base frame 121 being rotatably attached to the outer frame 10. The game board unit 12 is configured by assembling a game board 122, an image display device 123, a lamp relay board, a back cover 124, and the like on a base frame 121.

  Specifically, a game board 122 is mounted on the front side of the base frame 121, and an image display device 123, a lamp relay board, a rear cover 124 and the like are mounted on the rear side of the base frame 121.

  When the image display device 123 is attached to the rear side, an opening (not shown) is formed in the base frame body 121 and the game board 122 so that a liquid crystal screen (not shown) of the image display device 123 can be seen from the front side. ing.

  On the game board 122, a game area where a game ball flows is formed. The game board 122 is attached to the base frame 121 such that the game area faces the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the image display device 123 is attached to the rear side of the base frame 121. The image display device 123 is arranged so as to close the opening of the base frame 121. Further, the lamp relay board is attached to the rear side of the base frame 121. The back cover 124 covers a part of the back of the image display unit including the image display device 123 and the lamp relay board.

  On the rear side of the game board unit 12, an assembly 2 described later is assembled. The assembly 2 is assembled to the base frame 121 below a portion where the image display unit is covered by the back cover 124.

  As shown in FIG. 49, a fitting space 141 into which a glass plate is fitted is formed in the inner frame 14. Therefore, when the gaming machine 1 is assembled, a gaming area set on the gaming board of the gaming board unit 12 can be viewed from the front via the glass plate fitted in the fitting space 141. On the front side of the inner frame 14, an operation handle 142, an illumination lamp 143, and the like are provided.

  The assembly 2 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the assembly 2 includes the pedestal 20, the board case 3, and the protective cover 23. The pedestal 20 is a component used to attach the board case 3 to the rear side of the game board unit 12 (see FIG. 51). As shown in FIG. 53, the pedestal 20 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the left-right direction are longer than the two sides along the up-down direction. And a plate-shaped hook 22 is provided at the center of the upper side in the left-right direction. The axial direction of the shaft portion 21 coincides with the left-right direction.

  The board case 3 is provided with a pair of hook portions 49 to be engaged with each shaft portion 21. The pair of hook portions 49 are provided on a lower side of an outer case 45 described later. The hook portion 49 is formed in a U-shape that is convex toward the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 6, when attaching the board case 3 to the pedestal 20, the board case 3 is arranged such that the hook portions 49 are convex toward the rear side. Then, the hooks 49 can be engaged with the shafts 21. Therefore, the board case 3 is brought close to the pedestal 20, and the hooks 49 are engaged with the shafts 21.

  When the hook portion 49 is engaged with the shaft portion 21, the board case 3 is rotated counterclockwise (in the direction of the arrow C in FIG. 6) around the shaft portion 21 when viewed from the left side. On the pedestal 20. At this time, as shown in FIG. 52, the plate-shaped hook 22 provided on the upper side of the pedestal 20 is hooked on the recess 3a provided on the upper side of the substrate case 3. Therefore, the board case 3 is fixed to the pedestal 20 by the engagement between the hook portion 49 and the shaft portion 21 and the engagement between the plate-shaped hook 22 and the board case 3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the protective cover 23 is attached to the board case 3. The protective cover 23 covers a lower part of the board case 3 including the hook 49. In this manner, the assembly 2 is assembled and attached to the rear of the game board unit 12.

  The control board 501 and the board case 3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, a control board 501 for controlling a game is housed in the board case 3. A ROM 502 is mounted on the control board 501. A plurality of electronic components 595 different from the ROM 502 are mounted on the control board 501. The plurality of electronic components 595 include various electronic components such as an IC, a resistor, a connector, a capacitor, and a coil. As shown in FIG. 55B, a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776 are mounted on the control board 501. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are described in FIG. 55B, and may not be illustrated in other drawings.

  The ROM 502 stores stored contents (data) used for controlling a game. In addition, the ROM 502 stores storage contents (data) that affect the result of the game. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from the left to the right at the lower part of the control board 501. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided below the outer case 45 of the board case 3.

  The plurality of connectors 774 and 775 among the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are referred to as detection signal connectors 774 and 775. The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are connected to at least a part of a general winning opening detecting switch, a first starting opening detecting switch, a second starting opening detecting switch, and a special winning opening detecting switch for detecting that a game ball has won. Is input. In the present embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include a general winning opening detection switch, a first starting opening detection switch, a second starting opening detection switch, and a special winning opening detection switch 1 for detecting that a game ball has won. Assume that all signals are input. The detection signal connectors 774, 775 have a different color from the other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776. In the present embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 have a fluorescent color, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773 and 776 have a color different from the fluorescent color.

  The ROM 502 includes a plate-shaped main body 580 extending vertically and horizontally and a plurality of first signal pins 582. The first signal pin 582 is a signal pin for transmitting a signal between the ROM 502 and the control board 501. The first signal pins 582 are arranged so as to be visible via the board case 3. More specifically, the first signal pins 582 extend above and below the main body 580 of the ROM 502 and are electrically connected to the control board 501. Therefore, the first signal pin 582 is visible from the front via the board case 3.

  The signal pins provided on each of the plurality of electronic components 595 are referred to as second signal pins 583 (see FIG. 53). The second signal pin 583 transmits a signal between each of the plurality of electronic components 595 and the control board 501. The signal is not limited to a digital signal, but also includes an analog signal. It is arranged so as to be visible through the board case 3. Specifically, the second signal pin 583 extends upward, downward, leftward, rightward, or forward from each electronic component, and is electrically connected to the control board 501. For this reason, the second signal pin 583 is visible through the board case 3.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the board case 3 is a box-shaped case that accommodates the control board 501 and the ROM 502 so that they are visible and difficult to contact. The board case 3 includes the control board 501 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 (see FIG. 55B) mounted on the control board 501 can be visually recognized. The substrate case 3 is formed of, for example, a light-transmissive member such as transparent plastic.

  The board case 3 includes a plurality of members 511 including the control board 501 and a cutting member 6 for cutting the sealing seal 7. The plurality of members 511 include the inner case 40, the outer case 45, and the cap 8. The inner case 40 is combined with the outer case 45 to form an inner portion 581 that includes the control board 501. The outer case 45 is provided on the rear side of the board case 3 that is the ROM 502 side. The inner case 40 is provided on the front side of the board case 3 opposite to the ROM 502 side. In FIG. 52 (c), among the electric components provided on the control substrate 501 included in the transparent substrate case 3, only the ROM 502 is shown, and other electric components are not shown. (The same applies to FIG. 57 (a) and the like).

  As shown in FIG. 56, each case 40, 45 includes a control board storage section 41, 46 for storing a control board 501 (see FIG. 53) and a sealing base section 5 (see FIG. 57), which will be described later. Stop portions 51 and 56 are provided. The control board storage portions 41 and 46 are provided with plate portions 42 and 47 formed in a substantially rectangular shape and project from peripheral edges of these plate portions 42 and 47. It is formed in a shape having surrounding flange portions 43 and 48.

  As shown in FIG. 53, a cylindrical portion 565 extending rearward on the control board 501 side is provided on the left portion of the plate portion 42 of the inner case 40. A hole 566 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the cylindrical portion 565. A screw thread is formed inside the hole 566. In the control board 501, a hole 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565.

  Control board 501 is fixed to inner case 40. More specifically, a hole 567 of the control board 501 is arranged behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the inner case 40. The shaft of the screw 769 (see FIG. 55) is inserted into the hole 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 from the rear side of the control board 501 via the hole 567. The screw thread provided on the shaft of the screw 769 (see FIG. 55B) is combined with the screw thread formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565. As a result, the control board 501 is sandwiched between the head of the screw 769 and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565, and the control board 501 is fixed to the inner case 40. That is, the control board 501 is screwed to the inner case 40 side.

  As shown in FIG. 56, a portion of the flange portion 43 of the control board storage portion 41 that protrudes from the plate portion 42 along two long sides of the plate portion 42 (hereinafter referred to as a “male portion”). Is formed with three L-shaped hooking grooves 430 each.

  On the other hand, a portion of the flange portion 48 of the control board storage portion 46 projecting from the plate portion 47 along two long sides of the plate portion 47 (hereinafter referred to as a “female portion”) has a double wall shape. And an insertion groove 480 in which the male part of the control board storage part 41 can be inserted between the walls forming the double wall. A hook 481 is formed in each insertion groove 480.

  When the inner case 40 in which the control board 501 is screwed with the screws 769 and the outer case 45 are combined, the male part of the flange 43 is inserted into the female part of the flange 48. Then, the control board storage sections 41 and 46 are slid with each other in the direction of arrow α in FIG. 56 along the left-right direction. Then, the hooking groove 430 provided in the male portion engages with the hooking piece 481, so that the inner case 40 and the outer case 45 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α.

  When combined in this manner, the control board storage portions 41 and 46 form a box-shaped inner packet portion 581 that is shielded from the outside. The control board 501 (see FIG. 53) is stored in the inner packet part 581. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the like are exchanged illegally.

  The control board 501 is mounted inside the control board storage section 46 before the control board storage sections 41 and 46 are combined. At this time, an IC or the like mounted on the control board 501 is attached so as to face the plate portion 47 of the control board storage section 46. Since the plate portion 47 is also made of transparent plastic, even if the control board 501 is housed in the board case 3, electronic components such as the ROM 502 mounted on the control board 501 are illegally replaced. This is so that it can be confirmed from outside via the plate portion 47. As shown in FIG. 50, in the present embodiment, when the assembly 2 including the board case 3 is attached to the game board unit 12, the control board 501 in the board case 3 passes through the outer case 45 from the back side of the gaming machine 1. The mounted electronic components can be visually recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 56, sealing portions 51 and 56 are provided at the right ends of the cases 40 and 45, respectively. As shown in FIG. 57, a first screw piece 91 and a second screw piece 96 are provided on the cases 40 and 45 above the sealing portions 51 and 56.

  When the control board storage portions 41 and 46 are slid and combined, the sealing base portion 5 is formed by the sealing portions 51 and 56 at the longitudinal end of the sealing body 4 in which these are combined.

  As shown in FIG. 55, when the cap 8 is attached to the sealing body 4 so as to cover the sealing base portion 5, a first screwing piece 91 and a second screwing screw are provided at the longitudinal end of the sealing body 4. In addition to the piece 96, a third screwing piece 98 provided in the cap 8 overlaps to form a screwing portion 9 for screwing.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the sealing portions 51 and 56 project rightward from the right ends of the control board storage portions 41 and 46. The sealing portions 51 and 56 have the same height in the left-right direction and the same width in the up-down direction.

  Elongated grooves 512 and 562 are formed in the sealing portions 51 and 56 along the left-right direction. Two grooves 562 parallel to each other in the left-right direction are formed in the sealing portion 56 at predetermined intervals, and one groove 512 is formed in the sealing portion 51 along the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 57, when the cases 40 and 45 are combined as described above, the sealing parts 51 and 56 form the sealing base part 5 on the right part of the combined control board storage parts 41 and 46. I do.

  In the sealing base portion 5, the sealing portions 51 and 56 are arranged in parallel with a certain interval, and an insertion space 5a (see FIG. 57) is formed between the surfaces where the sealing portions 51 and 56 face each other. You.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the sealing seal 7 is used as a means for sealing the substrate case 3, and certifies that it is a genuine product issued by an organization or the like having a certification qualification.

  The sealing seal 7 is provided with an adhesive surface on one surface of a material such as paper which is easy to cut in consideration of cutting properties, and has a plurality of cuts. Although not shown, a hologram and a QR code (registered trademark) are printed on the seal 7. In addition, the seal seal 7 is also printed with the characters "opening prohibited".

  The cutting member 6 is formed in a shape having a base part 60, a pair of pinches 61, and a cutting part 64. The base part 60 which is the base of the cutting member 6 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cutting portion 64 is formed on one of two long sides of the base portion 60. The cutting part 64 is a part in which the tip of the base part 60 is formed in a blade shape. The knobs 61 are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base 60, and are formed in a shape that is entirely bent in a “<” shape. The left end of the knob 61 is referred to as a free end 61a.

  The cap 8 is formed to have a size capable of covering the entire sealing base 5 by covering the sealing base 5, and is detachably formed on the sealing base 5.

  The cap 8 includes a bowl 80 formed in a bowl shape that covers the sealing base 5, and a third screw stopper 98 formed at one longitudinal end of the box 80. On the inner surface of the box portion 80, a projection 82 is provided at a position where the free end portion 61a of the knob 61 of the cutting member 6 inserted into the insertion / extraction space 5a is hooked when the cap 8 is attached to the sealing base portion 5. Is provided. A groove 86 is formed on the inner surface of the box 80.

  The cutting member 6 is inserted into the insertion / extraction space 5a of the sealing base 5 (see FIG. 57). After that, the sealing seal 7 is attached. Further, when the cap 8 is put on the sealing base 5, the groove 86 fits into a part of the cutting member 6 inserted into the insertion / extraction space 5a. Further, the projection 82 engages with the free end 61 a of the knob 61 of the cutting member 6.

  As shown in FIG. 55, as described above, when the cap 8 is put on the sealing base part 5, the third screw fixing piece 98 becomes the first screw fixing piece 91 of the inner case 40 and the second screw fixing piece 91 of the outer case 45. The screwing piece 96 overlaps the combination with the screwing piece 96 to form the screwing portion 9 for screwing. When the caulking member 30 is driven into the screwed portion 9, the inner case 40, the outer case 45, and the cap 8 are fixed to each other.

  When unsealing the board case 3, the caulking member 30 is removed and the cap 8 is removed from the sealing base 5. The same is true when the seal of the board case 3 is unjustly opened.

  The cutting member 6 and the cap 8 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 8 is removed from the sealing base 5, the cutting member 6 is also removed from the sealing base 5 at the same time. Then, the seal seal 7 is irreparably damaged by the cutting portion 64 or the like.

  The identification display 520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the identification display 520 is attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502, the inner case 40, the outer case 45, and the cap 8. The identification display 520 is a display including information on the gaming machine 1. In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the control board 501 is called an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the ROM 502 is called an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the outer case 45 is called an identification display 523, and the identification display 520 provided on the inner case 40 is called an identification display 524. The identification mark 520 provided on the cap 8 is called an identification mark 525.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the control board 501 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. The identification display 522 is attached to the ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. The identification signs 523, 524, and 525 attached to the board case 3 are information identification units for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed at the upper right of the front surface of the inner case 40 by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the inner case 40 (see FIG. 57). The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 8 by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the cap 8. The display mode of the identification display 523 and the relationship with the information identification unit will be described later.

  The identifications 521 to 525 are related to each other and include at least an identification 529 indicating the same content. In the present embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string “ABCD01”, and the identification display 522 is a character string “ABCD02”. The identification display 523 is a character string of “ABCD03”, and the identification display 524 is a character string of “ABCD04”. The identification display 525 is a character string of “ABCD05”. The identification display 529 indicating the same content in the identification displays 521 to 525 is “ABCD”. The identification display 529 is a display corresponding to, for example, a manufacturer name and a model name. In the present embodiment, as an example, of “ABCD”, “AB” represents a manufacturer name, and “CD” represents a model name.

  In the identification displays 521 to 525, the manufacturer name is not displayed as “AB” included in “ABCD”, but as the “AA company” in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. May be. Further, instead of displaying the model name by “CD” included in “ABCD”, the model name itself may be displayed like “CR” in identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. In addition, a model may be displayed on the identification displays 521 to 525, such as the model “GH101” in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. In this case, the identification indications indicating the same contents in the identification indications 521 to 525 are the model name “CR”, the model “GH101”, and the manufacturer name “AA”.

  In the following description, the surface forming the inside of the substrate case 3 in the outer case 45 is referred to as the inner surface 532. In the outer case 45, a surface forming the outside of the board case 3 is referred to as an outer surface 531. As shown in FIG. 52 (c), FIG. 55 (c), and FIG. 57, a position display section 541 is provided on the outer surface 531. The position display unit 541 is a part that displays a position where the identification display 523 is provided. The position display section 541 is provided on a portion of the board case 3 that is different from the portion that overlaps the ROM 502. More specifically, the position display section 541 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear side, and is provided at a lower right portion of the outer case 45. The ROM 502 is provided on the left side of the position display section 541 when viewed from the rear side. The position display portion 541 is a concave portion that is concave toward the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 55B, a seal portion 542 formed of a light-transmitting material is attached to the position display portion 541. In the present embodiment, the seal portion 542 is assumed to be transparent as an example. A printing unit 797 is printed on the seal unit 542. In the present embodiment, as an example, the printing unit 797 is the identification display 523. Since the identification display 523 is printed on the seal portion 542, the position display portion 541 has the identification display 523 attached thereto. The seal portion 542 is arranged so as to straddle at least a part of the plurality of electronic components 595 in the board case 3. In other words, the seal portion 542 is arranged in the board case 3 so as to overlap the plurality of electronic components 595 when viewed from the rear. FIG. 55 (b) shows a part of the plurality of electronic components 595, and there are actually other electronic components (see FIG. 53). The identification display 523 of the outer case 45 is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. In the present embodiment, the visibility of the mounting location of the ROM 502 is not hindered by the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45. Note that, as in the case of a seal portion 1561 (see FIG. 64) in a modified example described later, when the board case 3 is at a predetermined angle, the identification display 523 may overlap the mounting location of the ROM 502.

  In this manner, when the seal portion or the like to which the identification mark is attached by printing or the like is attached and the object is in the state where the identification mark is attached, the seal portion or the like including the identification mark is called an information identification portion. It shall be. In the present embodiment, the seal portion 542 including the identification display 523 is an information identification portion. Note that the identification display 520 is attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502, the inner case 40, the outer case 45, and the cap 8, but is not attached to each, but is attached to two or more. Sometimes. For example, the ROM 502 may be provided with two identification displays, and similarly, there may be two information identification units.

  As described above, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is formed. In the present embodiment, a board case 3 containing the control board 501 is provided. As shown in FIG. 52, FIG. 53, FIG. 55, and FIG. 57, the substrate case 3 is provided with a position display section 541 that displays a position where the identification display 523 is provided. Therefore, as compared with the case where the position display section 541 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the board case 3. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is manufactured, the manufacturer can easily grasp the position where the identification display 520 is provided, as compared with the case where the position display section 541 is not provided. Therefore, for example, when the seal portion 542 is used and the identification display 523 is provided by the manufacturer, the possibility that the identification display 523 is provided at different positions among the plurality of gaming machines 1 can be reduced. Therefore, as compared with the case where the position display section 541 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the board case 3. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the position display section 541 is formed on the outer surface 531 of the substrate case 3 and is a concave portion for positioning the identification display 520. Since the position display portion 541 that is a concave portion is provided, the inspector can grasp the position of the position display portion 541 as compared with a case where the position display portion 541 is displayed on the plane of the substrate case 3 by printing or the like, for example. Easy to do. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the identification mark 523 attached to the board case 3. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the manufacturer can position the identification display 520 along the position display portion 541 that is a concave portion. For this reason, when mass-producing the gaming machine 1, the manufacturer can attach the identification mark 520 to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1. Since the identification display 520 is provided at the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1, the inspector can easily check the identification display 520. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the position display section 541 is provided on a portion of the board case 3 different from the portion overlapping the ROM 502. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the identification display 523 attached to the position display section 541 and the ROM 502 overlap. Therefore, the inspector can check both the identification display 523 and the ROM 502 at the same time. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily discover that the ROM 502 has been replaced due to fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  The position display section 541 is a recess formed on the outer surface 531 of the substrate case 3 for positioning the identification display 520 (523). Since the position display portion 541 that is a concave portion is provided, it is possible to prevent the peeling of the seal, for example, when the hand is touched, as compared with the case where the seal portion 542 is attached to the flat surface of the substrate case 3. it can. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector must confirm whether the seal is fraudulent, and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display portion 541, the seal portion is protected, so that the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the board case 3. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the seal portion 542 including the identification mark 523, which is the information identification portion attached to the board case 3, and the identification mark 522, which is the information identification portion attached to the ROM 502, are identification marks indicating at least the same contents. 529. Further, the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45 is displayed such that the mounting position of the ROM 502 has an angle at which the mounting position can be visually recognized. In the present embodiment, the visibility of the mounting location of the ROM 502 is not hindered by the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45. Since the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45 is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting position of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized, the inspector can identify the ROM 502 attached with the same identification display 529 and the board case 3. It is possible to easily confirm that no wrongdoing has been performed. Further, even if the ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraud, for example, the examiner can determine whether or not the identification display 529 attached to the ROM 502 and the board case 3 is the same. You can easily confirm that wrongdoing has taken place. For this reason, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  In addition, a seal portion 542 including an identification display 523, which is an information identification portion attached to the board case 3, an identification display 522, which is an information identification portion attached to the ROM 502, and an information identification portion displayed on the control board 501. The identification display 521 as a part includes at least an identification display 529 (in this embodiment, a character string of “ABCD”) indicating the same content. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm that the wrongdoing has not been performed by checking the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the board case 3 provided with the identification display 529 indicating the same contents. Further, even when at least one of the control board 501 and the ROM 502 is replaced with another control board 501 and the ROM 502 due to fraud, the identification signs 529 attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the board case 3 are the same. By judging whether or not there is, the inspector can easily confirm that the wrongdoing has been performed. For this reason, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  The board case 3 includes the control board 501 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 can be visually recognized. Since the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible, it is possible to easily determine whether, for example, a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the connectors 771 to 776. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  In addition, since the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are of a fluorescent color, it is easier for the inspector to visually recognize than the case where the detection signal connectors are not of the fluorescent color. For this reason, for example, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, a plurality of detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are provided. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 as compared with the case where the number of the detection signal connectors is one. For this reason, for example, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  The first signal pins 582 included in the ROM 502 are arranged so as to be visible through the board case 3. Since the first signal pin 582 is visible, it is possible to easily determine whether, for example, a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the first signal pin 582, or not. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the second signal pins 583 included in the plurality of electronic components 595 are arranged so as to be visible via the board case 3. Since the second signal pin 583 is visible, it is possible to easily determine whether, for example, a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the second signal pin 583, or not. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  The control board 501 is screwed to the inner case 40 with screws 769 (see FIG. 55B). For this reason, the control board 501 is less likely to be illegally replaced than when it is not screwed. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  The outer case 45 and the inner case 40 are slid and combined with each other. For this reason, even if a person who intends to cheat simply tries to separate the outer case 45 and the inner case 40 in order to separate the outer case 45 and the inner case 40, the outer case 45 and the inner case 40 are separated. Hard to do. Therefore, it is difficult to exchange control board 501 illegally. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various changes can be made. In the following modified examples, components corresponding to the components of the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Although the position display unit 541 is a concave portion, it is not limited to this. For example, the position display part 541 may be a convex part. FIG. 58 shows a cross section of the outer case 45 of the board case 1003 according to the modification of the board case 3 in the direction of the arrow AA shown in FIG. 55. As shown in FIG. 58, the position display portion 541 of the board case 1003 is a convex portion formed on the outer surface 531 of the outer case 45, and protrudes rearward. The position display section 541 is provided with an identification display 523 by a seal section 542.

  Further, the position display unit 541 is provided on the outer surface 531, but is not limited to this. For example, the position display section 541 may be provided on the inner surface 532. FIG. 59 shows a cross section of the outer case 45 of the board case 1103 according to the modified example of the board case 3 taken along the line AA shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 59, the position display portion 541 of the board case 1103 is a recess formed on the inner surface 532 of the board case 1103, and is recessed rearward. The position display section 541 is provided with an identification display 523 by a seal section 542. Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542. Therefore, the inspector can check the identification display 523 from behind the substrate case 1103 via the transparent outer case 45.

  FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the outer case 45 of the board case 1203 according to the modification of the board case 3 taken along the line AA shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 60, the position display portion 541 of the board case 1203 is a convex portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the board case 1203, and protrudes forward. The position display section 541 is provided with an identification display 523 by a seal section 542. Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542. Therefore, the inspector can check the identification display 523 from behind the substrate case 1203 via the transparent outer case 45.

  As described above, the position display portion 541 is a convex portion or a concave portion formed on the inner surface 532 or the outer surface 531 of the substrate case 3 for positioning the identification display 520. Since the position display portion 541 which is a convex portion or a concave portion is provided, for example, the inspector can set the position of the identification display 520 as compared with the case where the position display portion 541 is displayed on the plane of the substrate case 3 by printing or the like. Easy to grasp. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 520 attached to the board case 3. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the manufacturer can position the identification display 520 along the position display portion 541 that is a convex portion or a concave portion. For this reason, when mass-producing the gaming machine 1, the manufacturer can attach the identification mark 520 to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1. Since the identification display 520 is provided at the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1, the inspector can easily check the identification display 520. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the plurality of members 511 including the control board 501 may not include a part of the outer case 45, the inner case 40, and the cap 8. Further, the plurality of members 511 may further include members different from the outer case 45, the inner case 40, and the cap 8.

  In addition, although the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the plurality of members 511 are provided with the identification mark 520, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511 may have an associated identification mark 520 attached thereto. For example, the identification mark 525 may not be given to the cap 8 included in the plurality of members 511. Further, the identification mark 524 may not be provided on the inner case 40 included in the plurality of members 511. Further, the outer case 45 included in the plurality of members 511 may not be provided with the identification mark 523. The examiner can easily confirm whether or not fraud has been performed by checking the identification display 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511. For example, even if the control board 501 is replaced by another control board due to fraud, whether the control board 501 is associated with at least two of the plurality of members 511 by the identification mark 520 is determined. By judging this, the inspector can easily confirm that the wrongdoing has been performed. For this reason, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the identification display 520 may be attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45, and the inner case 40. In this case, the inspector checks the identification signs 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45, and the inner case 40, and easily checks whether or not an illegal act is performed. Can be. For example, even when the control board 501 is replaced by another control board due to fraud, the identification signs 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45, and the inner case 40 are related. By judging whether or not the fraudulent act has been performed, the inspector can easily confirm that the wrongdoing has been performed. For this reason, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the identification display 520 may be provided on at least the outer case 45 and the ROM 502. In this case, the inspector can confirm at least the outer case 45 and the identification display 520 attached to the ROM 502 to easily confirm whether or not an illegal act has been performed. For example, even if the ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraud, the inspector can easily determine whether at least the outer case 45 and the identification 520 attached to the ROM 502 are related. We can confirm that cheating was done. For this reason, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the identification indicators 520 only need to be related to each other. For example, all of the identifications 520 may be the same identification (for example, all “ABC D01”). Further, the identification displays 520 may be different displays, and the same identification display 529 may not be included. The description content of the identification display 520 is not limited as long as the inspector can confirm it. Further, the identification display 520 need not be a character string. For example, the identification mark 520 may be various marks. The manner in which the identification display 520 is provided is not limited. For example, not only the identification display 521 but also all the identification displays 521 to 525 may be printed and provided on the seal portion. Further, the seal portion may not be transparent. Further, all of the identification marks 523 to 525 may be stamped by a mold for manufacturing the board case 3.

  Further, the identification mark 520 may be formed inside the material of the board case 3. Hereinafter, the modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. A board case 1303 shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 is a modified example of the board case 3. In the board case 1303, a portion where the identification display 523 is displayed is referred to as an identification display 1390. A portion outside the identification display portion 1390 is referred to as an outside portion 1391. As shown in FIG. 62, the identification display portion 1390 protrudes rearward from the outer portion 1391. Therefore, thickness L1 of identification display portion 1390 is larger than thickness L2 of outer portion 1391.

  The identification display 523 is formed inside a member forming the identification display unit 1390 (in the present embodiment, the material of the outer case 45). The identification display 523 is provided in the identification display unit 1390 by being divided into a plurality (four in the present embodiment) of layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 in the thickness direction (front-back direction).

  The character 1371 of “A” in the identification display 523 is formed in the hierarchy 1381. The letter “B” 1372 is formed in the hierarchy 1382. The letter “C” 1373 is formed in the hierarchy 1383. The letter “D” 1374 is formed in the hierarchy 1384. The character 1375 of “0” is formed in the hierarchy 1382. The character 1376 of “3” is formed in the hierarchy 1383.

  Note that the method of forming the identification display 523 inside the member forming the identification display unit 1390 is not limited. For example, the identification mark 523 may be formed by 3D laser engraving. The 3D laser engraving is a technique of condensing a laser to form fine cracks of, for example, 100 microns inside the material of the substrate case 3 at intervals of, for example, 0.08 mm to 0.016 mm. By forming a plurality of the cracks, the identification mark 523 is formed inside the substrate case 3.

  In the present embodiment, the identification display 523 is formed inside a member forming the identification display unit 1390. Therefore, for example, the identification mark 523 is less likely to be removed than when the entirety of the identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface 531 or the inner surface 532 of the board case 3. Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved. If the identification mark 523 is removed by fraud, the substrate case 1303 is scratched. Therefore, the inspector can easily find the wrongdoing. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the identification display 523 is provided in the identification display portion 1390 by being divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction. Therefore, the identification mark 523 is less likely to be removed than when the identification mark 523 is formed only on one layer. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  In board case 1303, thickness L1 of identification display portion 1390 is larger than thickness L2 of outer portion 1391. In this case, the board case 3 needs to be cut deeper when an unauthorized person attempts to remove the identification mark 520 than when L1 is equal to or less than L2. Therefore, the substrate case 1303 is easily damaged. Therefore, the inspector can easily find the wrongdoing. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Note that the identification display 523 may not be divided in the identification display unit 1390 into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction. For example, the identification mark 523 may be formed on only one layer. The thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 may be equal to or less than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. In addition, although the identification mark 523 has been described, the identification mark 520 provided on the board case 1303 such as the identification marks 524 and 525 may be similarly formed inside the board case 1303.

  In the above embodiment, the board case 1303 is an example of the “case section” of the present invention.

  Various seals other than the seal portion 542 and the like may be attached to the board case 3. Further, the content displayed on a printing unit (for example, printing unit 797) provided on various stickers such as the sealing unit 542 is not limited. For example, in addition to a seal portion 542, a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to a substrate case 1551 according to a modification shown in FIG. In FIG. 63, members having the same configuration as the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The seal portion 1560 is affixed to the upper part of the outer case 45 of the board case 1551 at the center in the left-right direction. The seal portion 1561 is attached to an upper left portion of the outer case 45 of the board case 3. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are formed of a material having light transmittance. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are disposed so as to straddle a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 53). In FIG. 63, various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 53) located in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are not shown.

  The printing unit 1571 is printed on the seal unit 1560. The printing unit 1571 includes a plurality of areas 1575. The printing unit 1571 is colored, and has a white base as an example in the present embodiment. The plurality of areas 1575 include a code section 1572, an information display section 1573, and a description area 1570. The seal portion 1560 is provided so that the printing portion 1571, the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the description area 1570 are located at positions not overlapping the ROM 502.

  The code part 1572 is provided at the upper left of the seal part 1560. Code section 1572 includes predetermined information. The code portion 1572 is a portion from which information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in the present embodiment) area. I have. In the present embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

  The code section 1572 is associated with information indicating a delivery destination of the control board 501, which is stored in a device (hereinafter, referred to as “other device”) different from the gaming machine 1, for example. For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code section 1572, is read by a camera provided in the portable information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access another device via the network. As a result of accessing another device, information displayed on the information portable terminal includes a delivery destination of the control board 501 (for example, a store name to which the gaming machine 1 was delivered), and whether the gaming machine 1 has been disposed. Information is included. Thus, the inspector can easily confirm information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 and information such as whether the gaming machine 1 has been discarded.

  The information display unit 1573 includes various information. The information display unit 1573 may include, for example, the same information as the identification display 529. In the present embodiment, as an example, a character string of “EF001” is printed on the information display unit 1573 in a rectangular colored (white in the present embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, a management number of the control board 501. By using the management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string in the information display unit 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, and the like. The rectangular area of the information display unit 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code unit 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

  As an example, a total of six writing areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction. The description area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) base. Above the description area 1570 in the upper left, “opener” is printed in black. Above the description area 1570 in the upper right, “opened date” is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the description area 1570 at the upper left. A circle 2 is printed on the left side of the description area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left of the lower left description area 1570.

  For example, when the inspector opens the board case 3, the name of the inspector is described in the left description area 1570, and the date when the board case 3 is opened is described in the right description area 1570. In addition, the inspector may write, in the description area 1570, the date on which the control board 501 has been checked for illegality or the like.

  The seal portion 1560 includes a viewing portion 1574 for looking into the electronic component 798. The viewing portion 1574 is provided between the plurality of regions 1575. The viewing portion 1574 has a light transmitting property. In the present embodiment, the peep portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of the seal portion 1560, and is transparent. In the present embodiment, a peeping portion 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the writing areas 1570 in three rows in the vertical direction. In addition, a viewing section 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the code section 1572 and the information display section 1573 arranged side by side and the two upper writing areas 1570. A viewing portion 1574 extending vertically is provided between the writing regions 1570 in two rows in the left-right direction.

  The seal unit 1561 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of a model name, a model, and a manufacturer name is printed as specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, a model name “CR Ai”, a model name “GH101”, and a manufacturer name “AA company” are printed. In the present embodiment, a portion on which such information is printed is also referred to as a printing unit 1563. Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as an identification display 1595. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 is a model name “CR”, a model name “GH101”, and a manufacturer name “AA company”.

  Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the ROM 502. The seal portion 1562 is attached to the left side of the identification display 522 “ABC D02” of the ROM 502. The seal unit 1562 is an information identifying unit for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of a model name, a model, and a manufacturer name is printed as specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, the seal unit 1562 prints, as predetermined information, a model name “CR”, a model name “GH101”, and a manufacturer name “AA company”. Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as identification display 1596. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1596 is a model name “CR”, a model name “GH101”, and a manufacturer name “AA company”. Note that the identification display 522 of the ROM 502 is also an information identification unit. That is, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two information identification units.

  Further, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least identification marks 1595 and 1596 indicating the same contents. In the present embodiment, the identification name 1595, 1596 has the same species name "CR", the model name "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA company", but it is sufficient if a part of them is the same.

  The identifications 1595 and 1596 are provided on the board case 3 and the ROM 502, but may be provided on other members. For example, the control board 501 may be displayed including the same identifications as the identifications 1595 and 1596.

  As described above, the board case 1551, the control board 501, and the like according to the present modification are formed. In the present embodiment, since the seal portions 542, 1560, 1561 are arranged so as to straddle at least a part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 53), for example, the seal portions 542, 1560, 1561 and the electronic component 595 By checking the positional relationship, the inspector can determine whether the control board 501 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, since the area 1575 is provided, the inspector can write the name of the inspector and the date when the board case 3 was opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the description area 1570). it can. In addition, the inspector can also write the date or the like when the control board 501 has been checked for illegality in the area 1575. Further, since the peeping portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than when only the region 1575 is provided. This makes it easier for the inspector to check the characters and the like described in the area 1575. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, since the peeping portion 1574 is provided, the inspector can check the electronic component 798 via the peeping portion 1574. Therefore, as compared with the case where the peeping section 1574 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 798 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the code portion 1572 is provided at a position where the code portion 1572 does not overlap with the ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has occurred. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  The code section 1572 is linked to information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501, which is stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1. Thus, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 using the code section 1572. For this reason, the inspector can confirm the information of the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not the unauthorized installation of the control board 501 to which the delivery destination is different has been performed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal portion 1562. Therefore, by checking the seal portion 1562, the inspector can easily check whether the ROM 502 is replaced. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  In addition, since at least one of the model name, model, and manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name, model type, and manufacturer name. Can be. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name, the model, and the manufacturer name, and easily determine whether or not fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with ease. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  Note that the shape of the ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 55, the ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-shaped main body 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the main body 580 may extend in the front, rear, left, and right directions. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the control board 501. When the main body 580 extends in the front, rear, left and right directions, the predetermined information displayed on the seal 1591 may be displayed on the upper surface or the lower surface of the main body 580.

  Further, various types of information displayed on the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 may be displayed so that the mounting portion of the ROM 502 has an angle at which the mounting portion can be visually recognized. For example, FIG. 64 is a diagram in which the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 are viewed obliquely from above at the rear. In FIG. 64, illustration of members other than the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 is omitted. In this case, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 overlaps the mounting location of the ROM 502. That is, FIG. 64 is a diagram in which the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is viewed from an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 is difficult to visually recognize. However, as shown in FIG. 63, when viewed from the rear side, the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. That is, FIG. 63 is a diagram in which the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is viewed from an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. As described above, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is displayed so that the mounting location of the ROM 502 has an angle at which the information can be visually recognized. Although the seal portion 1561 has been described as an example, various kinds of information (for example, information of the identification display 523) displayed on the other seal portions 542 and 1560 are displayed such that the mounting portion of the ROM 502 has an angle at which the mounting portion can be visually recognized. It should be done.

[Description of Eighth Embodiment]
Next, an eighth embodiment which is an example of an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 65-1 to 65-6. Note that, in an eighth embodiment described below, components having the same configuration as the seventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as the seventh embodiment, and detailed description is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 65A to FIG. 65D, an outline of a configuration of a board case 1700 and a control board 1705 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 65A is a rear view of the board case 1700 in which the control board 1705 according to the eighth embodiment is stored. FIG. 65-2 (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of the seal portion 1710, and FIG. 65-2 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of the date mark portion 1720. FIG. 65-3 (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730, and FIG. 65-3 (b) illustrates a state where the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is attached to the substrate case 1700. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 65-4 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display configuration of the information display 1750.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment includes a control board 1705 and a board case 1700 that houses the control board 1705. The board case 1700 has substantially the same configuration as the board case 1551 which is a modified example of the seventh embodiment, but includes a seal portion 1710, a date mark portion 1720, an opening prohibition seal 1730, and a RAM clear operation portion 1785 to be described later. ing. The control board 1705 has substantially the same configuration as the control board 501 which is a modification of the seventh embodiment, but includes an information display 1750, an operation key unit 1780, and a RAM clear button, which will be described later.

  The seal portion 1710 is formed of a material having light transmissivity, and is affixed to the upper part of the outer case 45 of the substrate case 1700 at the center in the left-right direction. Note that each of the seal portions 1710 is disposed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) and the like. The date mark portion 1720 is formed at the lower part of the center of the outer case 45 in the left-right direction of the substrate case 1700 so as to be convex from the outer case 45 on the front side of the outer case 45. The opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is attached to a seal attachment portion 1701 formed on the right end in the left-right direction of the board case 1700. Note that the seal affixing portion 1701 is a portion covered by the cap 8. The RAM clear operation unit 1785 is formed at the lower part on the right side in the left and right direction of the outer case 45 of the board case 1700, and is configured to be able to operate the RAM clear button on the control board 1705. The operation key portion 1780 has a structure in which a specific key can be inserted and rotated. When the specific key is exposed from the outer case 45 of the board case 1700, the control board 1705 is mounted on the board case. It is provided so as to be operable while housed in 1700. The operation key unit 1780 is connected to a main CPU that controls a game of the gaming machine 1 so as to be able to transmit a signal indicating whether or not the operation key unit 1780 has been operated.

  The information display 1750 is provided in the upper right corner of the right and left direction of the control board 1705 and is disposed inside a board case 1700 made of a transparent resin and covering the control board 501. The information display 1750 is located at a position different from the position where the main CPU, the main ROM, and the main RAM provided on the control board 501 are provided, and is a RAM clear operation unit provided on the board case 1700. It is provided at a position where viewing is not hindered by 1785, a seal portion 1710, or the like. Neither of the plurality of electronic components provided on the control board 1705 such as the electronic component 595 are provided around and near the information display 1750. Such an information display 1750 is conspicuous despite being provided on the control board 1705 housed in the board case 1700, so that the displayed information can be easily recognized.

  Here, the information display 1750 and the out ball detection switch (not shown) will be described. The out ball detection switch detects all game balls (in this embodiment, referred to as “out ball”) fired in the game area, and transmits data of the detection result to the main control board 300 so that the connection cable can transmit the data. Connected. The information display 1750 displays various performances of the gaming machine 1 by numerical values calculated by the main CPU based on the detection result of the out ball detection switch (calculated values by a calculation formula described later). is there. It should be noted that whether or not the performance of the gaming machine 1 is maintained can be determined based on whether or not the numerical value displayed on the information display 1750 is within a predetermined range.

  As shown in FIG. 65-2 (a), the seal portion 1710 has substantially the same configuration as the seal portion 1560, and includes a print portion 1711, a code portion 1712, an information display portion 1713, a writing area 1570, and a peeping portion 1574. Have. The information displayed on the predetermined terminal by reading the QR code (registered trademark) of the code unit 1712 with the predetermined terminal includes a character string described in the information display unit 1713. . That is, the predetermined information including the specific information is displayed in different modes such as the QR code (registered trademark) of the code unit 1712 and the character string of the information display unit 1713. Here, the configuration of the code section 1712 and the information display section 1713 is different from the configuration of the code section 1572 and the information display section 1573 of the seal section 1560. Specifically, the character string of “EF001” is printed across the colored area of the code section 1712 and the colored area of the information display section 1713. In the case of the seal portion 1710 having such a configuration, if one of the colored region of the code portion 1712 and the colored region of the information display portion 1713 is scraped and information is illegally changed, compared with the seal portion 1560, The trace of the change can be easily clarified, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized change of the information. Further, as described above, the electronic component 798 provided at the position covered by the seal portion 1560 is visible from the peeping portion 1574. This is because at least a part or the whole of the electronic component 798 is located on the control board. Not only perpendicular to the control board, but also visible from the direction perpendicular to the control board via the peep portion 1574. It is. Specifically, an electronic component provided at a position covered by the seal portion 1560 and which is difficult to be visually recognized by the colored region 1575 from a direction perpendicular to the control board 1705 is the seal portion. That is, it can be visually recognized through the viewing unit 1574 from a direction that is not perpendicular to the 1560 but forms a predetermined angle.

  As shown in FIG. 65B, the date mark portion 1720 is a portion for displaying the date when the board case 1700 was manufactured, and is composed of a date display portion 1721 and a date display portion 1726. . The date display unit 1721 has scales of 1 to 31 formed on the outer edge of a circular shape, and has a form in which the date manufactured by an arrow extending from the center of the circle is indicated. The year / month display portion 1726 has scales of 1 to 12 formed on the outer edge of the circular shape, indicates the month manufactured by an arrow extending from the center of the circle, and is manufactured by the numbers formed at the center of the circle. The year is indicated. That is, the date mark portion 1720 shown in FIG. 65B indicates that the substrate case 1700 was manufactured on “December 1, 2014”. The date mark portion 1720 shown in FIG. 65-2 (b) is a case where the outer case 45 is viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 1, and the board case 1700 is viewed from the back side of the gaming machine 1. In this case, it is shown inverted (for example, see FIG. 65A).

  As shown in FIG. 65-3 (a), the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 includes an information display portion 1731 on which a predetermined character string is printed, a code portion 1732 on which a QR code (registered trademark) or the like is printed, and a forgery-resistant A hologram display section 1735 on which a hologram is formed. The information displayed on the predetermined terminal by reading the QR code (registered trademark) of the code section 1732 with the predetermined terminal includes a character string described in the information display section 1731. Is also good. That is, the predetermined information including the specific information may be displayed in different modes such as the QR code (registered trademark) of the code section 1732 and the character string of the information display section 1731.

  As shown in FIG. 65-3 (b), when the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 is attached to the seal attachment portion 1701, it is attached so as to straddle the inner case 40 and the outer case 45 of the board case 1700. It is attached so as to cover a part of the boundary portion 1738 when the inner case 40 and the outer case 45 are combined. That is, since the inner case 40 and the outer case 45 are disassembled to come into contact with the control board 1705 housed in the board case 1700, the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is broken. In other words, the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is an identification display portion whose shape changes when the substrate case 1700 is disassembled, unlike an identification display portion to which various identification information such as the seal portion 1705 is attached. In addition, the information display portion 1731 and the code portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 have the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 affixed on the back side of the gaming machine 1 in the seal affixing portion 1701 so as to be entirely visible. Furthermore, the information display portion 1731 and the code portion 1732 of the unsealing-prohibiting seal portion 1730 are provided at positions lower by one step in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700 than the top surface of the substrate case 1700 in the thickness direction. Can be That is, the seal portion 1710 and the unopening seal portion 1730 in the board case 1700 are configured such that the distance from the virtual plane in which the control board 1705 extends in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the control board 1705 is different. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 65-4, the information display 1750 includes a control unit (not shown), four 7-segment display units 1770a to 1770d arranged in a horizontal line, and a lower right of each of the 7-segment display units. It comprises four formed dot display sections 1775a to 1775d. In addition, the information display 1750 receives data from the main control board 300 so that the main control board 300 that has received the result detected by the out ball detection switch 302a outputs data measured based on the detection result. Output is connected to enable. Further, the information display 1750 is constantly lit when the power of the gaming machine 1 is ON. In the information display 1750, when viewed from the front, the two 7-segment display units 1770a and 1770b and the two dot display units 1775a and 1775b located on the left side are used as the identification display unit 1780a, and the two The 7-segment display units 1770c and 1770d and the two dot display units 1775c and 1775d are ratio display units 1780b. The circuits are connected to the four 7-segment display units 1770a to 1770d and the four dot display units 1775a to 1775d.

[Description of Display Mode on Information Display 1750]
Next, a specific display mode on the information display 1750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65-5 and 65-6. FIG. 65-5 is a table for explaining the content and display form displayed on the information display 1750 with respect to the performance display of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 65-6 is a table for explaining the setting display of the gaming machine 1 with the information display 1750. It is a table | surface explaining the content displayed and a display form.

  As shown in FIG. 65-5, when displaying the performance of the gaming machine 1 on the information display 1750, the numerical value calculated by the main control board 300 is displayed on the ratio display section 1780b. Specifically, a game when the gaming state is in a low-accuracy state in a predetermined section from the time of the first power-on (every time when the total number of out-balls becomes 300 and the total number of out-balls becomes 60000 after the initial power-on) The ratio between the number of balls to be paid out and the number of out-balls of the game balls in the low-accuracy state (for example, when the game is not a time-saving game in the low-accuracy state) is output. The number of balls) ÷ (the number of out-balls in the low-probability state) × 100 ”, and a value obtained by rounding off the first decimal place is output. If the output numerical value is 100 or more, “99.” is displayed on the ratio display section. In addition, even if the RAM is cleared and the power is turned on again, the setting is made so that the measurement up to now is taken over unless the RAM is abnormal.

  In the identification display section 1780a, information that can identify the type of numerical value displayed on the ratio display section 1780b is displayed. Specifically, “bL.” Is displayed when the measurement value of the current section at the present time is displayed, and “b1. "To" b3. "Are displayed. The blinking cycle in FIG. 65-5 is 0.3 seconds on and 0.3 seconds off, and the display switching timing of “bL.” To “b3.” Is repeated for 5.0 seconds in each display. Shall be.

  Here, a flow of measurement in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. First, when the game machine 1 is powered on for the first time to start a game, the out ball detection switch starts detection of game balls discharged from the out ball discharge port in the low accuracy state. Here, since the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge ports are from all the out ports in the game area, the number of game balls based on the detection result of the out ball detection switch is the total number of out balls. After the total number of outgoing balls reaches 300, a payout ball measuring switch (a switch for detecting the number of game balls paid out as prize balls, not shown) for each predetermined section in a low-probability state, and The calculated value calculated by the main CPU is output on the information display 1750 based on the detection result of the out ball detection switch.

  The gaming machine 1 can change the setting of the jackpot probability, and can change the setting of the jackpot probability by operating the setting key 1780 and the RAM clear button of the RAM clear operation unit 1785. Specifically, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is ON and the RAM clear button “ON” is set by the setting key 1780 “ON”, the setting of the jackpot probability is changed according to the number of times the RAM clear button is pressed. When the user wants to change the setting, the user can set the setting key 1780 to “OFF” to confirm the setting. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is ON and the RAM clear button is not operated with the setting key 1780 “ON”, the current setting of the jackpot probability of the gaming machine 1 is displayed on the information display 1750 as described later. , You can check the settings. When the gaming machine 1 is shipped, when the recovery information is damaged, when the power is turned on / off while the setting is being changed, and the recovery error state occurs, the power is turned on and the setting key 1780 is turned “ON” in the same manner as described above. When the clear button is turned “ON”, the setting can be changed. However, if the power is ON and the RAM clear button is not operated with the setting key 1780 “ON”, the game is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 65-6, specifically, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set from a first setting (low probability: 1/300) to a sixth setting (high probability: 1/250). ) Can be set in six stages. In this setting change and setting confirmation, in the 7-segment display unit 1770d located on the right side of the information display unit 1750, “1” to “6” are changed according to the set value to be changed or the currently set value. It is lit. Further, when the setting is changed, all the 7-segment display units 1770a to 1770d and the dot display units 1775a to 1775d blink for 5 seconds from the end of the setting change. Then, after the blinking for 5 seconds, the display of the performance of the gaming machine 1 is started on the identification display unit 1780a and the ratio display unit 1780b. During the setting change and the setting confirmation, during the setting change / setting confirmation, a sound indicating the current state such as “Setting is being changed.” A message such as "Setting is being changed / Setting is being checked" is displayed on the liquid crystal display. In such a gaming machine, regardless of the type of setting of the jackpot probability, the selection rate of a specific effect (in FIG. 65-6, referred to as “first effect”) at the time of the jackpot, and the loss rate The selection rate of a specific effect at that time is constant.

  Here, the terms used in the table of FIG. 65-6 will be described. The “(at the time of big hit / at the time of loss) first effect selection rate” is “first effect” selected (executed) in an effect that is executed when it is determined to be “big hit” or “losing”. As described above, the “first effect selection rate” is constant regardless of the jackpot probability of each of the first to sixth settings, as described above. The “first effect appearance rate” is a probability that the “first effect” is executed in an effect that is executed based on a ball entering the first starting device or the second starting device. Is a numerical value that can be calculated by multiplying the “big hit probability” in each setting by the “first effect selection ratio.” The “first effect appearance ratio” in the case of “losing” Multiplies the “probability of loss” in each setting by the “selection rate of the first effect” "Loss probability" refers to the probability of being determined as "losing" in the determination based on the ball entering the first starting device or the second starting device in the non-probable changing game state. It is a numerical value that can be calculated by subtracting the “big hit probability” from “1.” The “total first effect appearance rate” refers to the value of the first start device or the second start device in the non-probable change game state. In the effect selected (executed) together with the judgment based on the incoming ball, it is the probability that the “first effect” is executed.This “total first effect appearance rate” is the “first effect at the time of big hit” in each setting. It is a numerical value that is the sum of the "1 effect appearance rate" and the "1st effect appearance rate in the case of a loss." The "1st effect reliability" refers to the first starter or With the judgment based on the ball entering the second starting device, the “first production” When executed, it is the probability that the executed “first effect” is the “first effect” executed with the determination of “big hit.” The “first effect reliability” is the “first effect reliability”. This is a numerical value that can be calculated by dividing the “1 effect appearance rate” by the “total 1st effect appearance rate”.

[Operation and Effect of Eighth Embodiment]
In the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, since the peeping portion 1574 is provided in the seal portion 1720, the inspector can use the board case through the peeping portion 1574. By visually recognizing the control board 1705 stored in the control board 1700, it can be confirmed whether or not the control board 1705 has been tampered with. Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine having a board case in which an object such as the peep portion 1574 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the control board 1705 has been tampered with. It is possible to reduce the possibility of fraud. Further, in such a seal portion 1720, a predetermined character can be described in the description region 1570, which is a plurality of colored regions, so that a predetermined portion is provided in a transparent portion without a colored region that has reduced light transmittance. This is also easier for the inspector to confirm the content of the information by the character than a seal on which the character is described. Further, in such a seal portion, since the transparent peep portion 1574 is provided between the description region 1570, the code portion 1712, and the information display portion 1713, which are a plurality of colored regions, only the plurality of colored regions are arranged. The colored area is more conspicuous than provided, and the inspector can easily check the characters and the like described in the description area 1570, the code section 1712, and the information display section 1713.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, the opening date described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date mark The date of manufacture displayed on the unit 1720 is different information but has a predetermined time-series relationship. Specifically, the date of opening described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 is always a newer date than the date of manufacture displayed on the date mark portion 1720. Therefore, the inspector confirms the consistency between the date of opening of the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date of manufacture of the date mark portion 1720, thereby preventing an unauthorized act such as an unauthorized exchange of a control board. It can be easily confirmed.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1 having the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1720 and the unsealing-prohibited seal portion 1730 as in the present embodiment, the information displayed on the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 of the seal portion 1720 is provided. Is linked to the information displayed on the opening prohibition seal portion 1730. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm an improper act such as an improper exchange of the control board by confirming the consistency between the information of the seal portion 1720 and the information of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730. Further, the code portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is different from the virtual surface in the thickness direction of the board case 1700 by extending the control substrate 1705 in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction. The distance is different from the distance between the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 of the seal portion 1720. Therefore, the inspector can compare the code portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 with the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 of the seal portion 1720 at the same height and on the same plane. The information in the code portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730, the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720, and the information display portion 1713 can be easily visually recognized, and it is possible to easily confirm an improper act such as an improper control board exchange.

  According to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 as in the present embodiment, the characters 1371 and 1372 are different from each other in the thickness direction of the identification display unit 1390. Since the characters 1371 of the layer 1381 and the characters 1372 of the layer 1382 are formed such that the distance from the top surface of the board case 1700 is different. Since the identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, the identification mark 523 is removed, for example, as compared with a case where the entire identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, since the identification mark 523 is provided at a position where the distance from the top surface in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700 is different, that is, divided and provided in a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification mark 523 is formed only in one layer. It is difficult to remove compared to the case. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed by fraud or the like, the substrate case 1700 will be conspicuously damaged by being polished or shaved. Can be said to be easy and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Furthermore, the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 are separated from each other when viewed from the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the assembly 2 because the characters 1371 and 1372 in the plan view have no overlapping portion and are separated from each other. Both the character 1372 and the character 1372 can be bird's eye view, and it is also possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of an illegal act on the control board 1705 or the like.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 as in the present embodiment, the characters 1371 and 1372 are in the thickness direction of the identification display unit 1390. Since the layers are formed so as to be at different levels, the characters 1371 of the level 1381 and the characters 1372 of the level 1382 are placed on a predetermined surface of the control board 1705 (for example, the control board 1705 is oriented in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction). (Extended virtual plane). Since the identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, the identification mark 523 is removed, for example, as compared with a case where the entire identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, since the identification mark 523 is provided at a position different in distance from a predetermined surface of the control board 1705, that is, divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification mark 523 is formed only in one layer. It is more difficult to remove. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed by fraud or the like, the substrate case 1700 will be conspicuously damaged by being polished or shaved. Can be said to be easy and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Furthermore, the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 are separated from each other when viewed from the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the assembly 2 because the characters 1371 and 1372 in the plan view have no overlapping portion and are separated from each other. Both the character 1372 and the character 1372 can be bird's eye view, and it is also possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of an illegal act on the control board 1705 or the like.

  Further, in the case of the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1712 and the character string of the information display portion 1713 are similar. Information linked to each other and including the same specific information is displayed in different modes. Therefore, it is difficult for the code part 1712 to be fraudulent, and even if the information in the information display part 1713 has been tampered with, the inspector can check the consistency with the code part 1712 to easily determine the presence or absence of fraud. As well as deterrence of wrongdoing. Further, in the seal portion 1720, since the peeping portion 1574 is formed between the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 and the writing area 1570, the illegal operation is performed on the control board 1705 as described above. Since it is possible to easily confirm whether the information has been tampered with, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraud.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1710 and the information display 1750 as in the present embodiment, for example, some electronic components such as the information display 1750 and the like have the peep portion 1574. It is visible without any intervention. Therefore, some electronic components that require immediate and easy visual recognition are easy to visually recognize, so that it is easy to confirm fraudulent activities. In addition, some of the electronic components that can be viewed without the peeping portion 1574 are more conspicuous on the control board 1705 than the electronic components that can be viewed through the peeping portion 1574. Unauthorized acts on some possible electronic components can be suppressed. In particular, since the information display 1750 is a member that requires easy visual recognition by opening the game board unit 12 of the gaming machine 1, it is necessary to exhibit the above-described effects.

[Other Embodiments of Eighth Embodiment]
Although the detailed description is omitted in the above-described embodiment, it also has seal portions 542, 1561, and 1562, identification indicators 521, 522, and 523, and connectors 771 to 776. Among these, the seal portions 542, 1561, and 1562 and the identification displays 521, 522, and 523 display predetermined information that can be identified, and thus may be so-called identification displays. In addition, the display of the identifiable predetermined information includes a seal portion 1710, a date mark portion 1720, an opening prohibition seal portion 1730, and an information display 1750 that displays a performance display and a setting display of the gaming machine. May be included. Further, although not shown, among various electronic components provided on the control board 1705, a color code displayed on a lead resistance, an identification code displayed on a network resistance, a model number displayed on an IC, a capacitor, or a transistor. The code or the like may also be an identification display because predetermined information that can be identified is displayed. Since the shape and the number of pins of the openings of the connectors 771 to 776 in the above-described embodiments are different from each other, the shape and the number of pins of the openings of the connectors 771 to 776 are identifiable information. It may be included in the display. Although not shown, a connector number is displayed on the control board 1705 near each of the connectors 771 to 776, and this connector number is also identifiable information, and may be included in the identification display. Is also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the peeping portion 1574 of the seal portion 1710, the electronic component of the control board 1705 is visible from the peeping portion 1574. However, the electronic component of the control board 1705 may be of various modes as long as it is a region that can be visually recognized even through the board case 1705, and the same effect is obtained. For example, if a plurality of colored regions are provided with a region that is difficult to view, and if the control substrate can be viewed from a region having a higher light transmittance than the color region, the region is also similar. Has the effect of In these visible areas, not only the electronic components of the control board can be viewed, but also the control board itself, the wiring pattern of the control board, the feet of the electronic components, and the like can be viewed. . In these visible areas, a transparent socket (connector) of a ROM, which will be described later, can be visually recognized, and a transparent socket (connector) not only for the ROM but also for various electronic components such as ICs, transistors, and various resistors. Are provided, those transparent sockets (connectors) can be visually recognized. When such a visible area is provided, the same effect is obtained that fraudulent acts on electronic components can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the identification mark 523 is printed on the seal portion 542, but is formed inside the member forming the board case 1700 as described with reference to FIGS. An identification display 523 may be provided. The identification display 523 may be composed of the characters 1371 to 1376 as described above, but is not limited thereto, and may have various configurations. For example, it may be constituted by a plurality of identifiable predetermined information, that is, constituted by a plurality of identification displays. That is, a plurality of identification displays may be formed in a plurality of layers. For example, a configuration as shown in FIG. 65-7 may be used. FIG. 65-7 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the identification display formed inside the member forming the board case. FIG. 65A is a cross-sectional view of the identification display portion 1791 of the board case 1790 according to the modification. (B) is a cross-sectional view of an identification display section 1796 of a board case 1795 according to a modification. The identification marks 1794 and 1799 in FIG. 65-7 are formed by, for example, 3D laser engraving inside the identification display parts 1791 and 1796, like the identification marks 523 in FIG. 61 and FIG. . Also, the identification signs 1794, 1799 and the identification sign 523 (see FIGS. 61 and 62) may be formed by molding the substrate case with a mold.

  As shown in FIG. 65-7 (a), the identifications 1794 on the board case 1790 according to the modification include five identifications “A”, “B”, “C”, “0”, and “3”. It is formed inside a member (a material of the outer case) forming the identification display portion 1791. Further, the identification display 1794 is provided in the identification display portion 1791 in three layers 1793a to 1793c in the thickness direction. In the identification display 1794, the identification display 1792b of “A” is formed in the hierarchy 1793a, the identification display 1792c of “B” is formed in the hierarchy 1793b, and the identification display 1792a of “C” and “0” are formed. 1792d and the identification display 1792e of “3” are formed so as not to overlap in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 65A) in the hierarchy 1793c. When the identification display unit 1791 having such a configuration is viewed from the left side (the direction from left to right in the left-right direction in FIG. 65A), each of “A”, “B”, and “C03” is different. In addition to being visually recognizable as a hierarchy, the identification display 1794 having a configuration in which “C”, “0”, and “3” do not overlap can be visually recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 65-7 (b), the identifications 1799 on the board case 1795 according to the modified example are “A”, “B”, “C”, “0”, and “3”, like the identifications 1794. . Are formed inside a member (a material of the outer case) forming the identification display portion 1796. The identification display 1794 is provided in the identification display portion 1791 so as to be divided into four layers 1793a to 1793d in the thickness direction. In the identification display 1799, the identification display 1797b of “A” is formed on the hierarchy 1798a, the identification display 1797d of “B” and the identification display 1797c of “0” are formed on the hierarchy 1798b, and “3”. 1797a is formed on the hierarchy 1798c, and the identification “1797e” of “C” is formed on the hierarchy 1798d. Then, when the identification display unit 1796 is visually recognized from the back side of the gaming machine 1, "A", "B", and "C" can be visually recognized so as not to overlap in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 65A). When the identification display unit 1796 is viewed from the left side (the direction from left to right in the left-right direction in FIG. 65A), the identification display 1799 is configured such that “0” and “3” do not overlap at different levels. Can be visually recognized.

  According to the identification signs 1794 and 1799 and the identification sign 523 (see FIGS. 61 and 62) having such a configuration, the distance from the top surface of the board case to the specific identification mark is different, or the board is stored in the board case. The distance from the control board 1705 to a specific identification display may be different. Specifically, for example, in the identification display 1794, the identification display 1792b is configured such that the distance from the top surface of the board case 1790 is smaller than the identification display 1792a, but the distance from the control board 1705 is larger. Is formed. The identification mark 1792c is formed so that the distance from the top surface of the board case 1790 is smaller than the identification mark 1792a, but larger than the identification mark 1792b. On the other hand, the identification display 1792c is formed so that the distance from the control board 1705 is larger than the identification display 1792a, but smaller than the identification display 1792b.

  Further, according to the identification signs 1794 and 1799 and the identification sign 523 (see FIGS. 61 and 62) having such a configuration, the surface constituting the thickness of the identification display portion (the side surface in the left-right direction in FIG. 65-1). The distance from the surface to be formed) to the specific identification can be configured to be different. According to the identification signs 1794 and 1799 and the identification sign 523 (see FIGS. 61 and 62) having such a configuration, the top surface of the board case, the control board 1705, and the surface constituting the thickness of the identification display portion. It is also possible to configure so that the distance of the specific identification display from either of them is substantially the same. As described above, in the case where the identification display is formed in a plurality of layers inside the member forming the identification display portion, similarly to the above, each identification display is difficult to be removed, and when the identification display is cut and removed. , A trace of removal remains, thereby suppressing the occurrence of fraud. In the above description, the distance from the control board 1705 to each identification display means the distance from the surface of the control board 1705 on which the wiring pattern is formed to each identification display.

  Further, according to the identification display 1799 having such a configuration, it is possible to configure so that the directions and angles at which the identification displays can be visually recognized are different. Specifically, as described above, the identification display 1797a and the identification display 1797b in the identification display 1799 are configured to be visible from different directions and angles. Therefore, with the identification display formed in this way, the identification display can be formed in a direction and an angle that are easy for the inspector to visually recognize, and it can lead to suppression of fraud. In addition, when there is a member near the identification display unit that hinders the visual recognition of the identification display (for example, a member having a thickness larger than the thickness of the identification display unit), the position is such that the visibility is not hindered by the member. Each identification can also be formed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the identification display section, a member that inhibits visual recognition of the identification display may not be provided.

  Further, in the above-described identification displays 1794 and 1799, the individual identification displays 1792a to 1792e and 1797a to 1797e are configured, but one of the plurality of identification displays is one identification display. It may be one that forms an identification display. Specifically, in the identification display 1794, two pieces of identification information 1792b and 1792c constitute predetermined information which can be identified, and three pieces of identification information 1792a, 1792d and 1792e constitute predetermined information which can be identified. It may be. In the identification display 1799, predetermined information that can be identified by the two identifications 1797a and 1797c is formed, and predetermined information that can be identified by the three identifications 1797b, 1797d, and 1797e is visible. Different identification displays may be configured according to different directions and angles. Then, in the identification displays 1794 and 1799, similarly to the identification display 523 described in FIGS. 61 and 62, each of the five identification displays may constitute one identifiable predetermined information. As one example of the predetermined information that can be identified by the five identification indications, there is a combination of “manufactured”, “constructed”, “number”, “number”, and “NО.”. More specifically, for example, in the identification display portion 1791, “Production” and “Production” are displayed as identifications on the hierarchy 1793a, “No.” and “No.” are displayed as identifications on the hierarchy 1793b, and the hierarchy 1793c , "N @." And "1234" may be displayed as identification displays. Also, in the identification display portion 1390 (see FIGS. 61 and 62), “manufactured” is displayed as the identification display at the position of the identification display 1371 of the hierarchy 1381, and “is made” as the identification display at the position of the identification display 1372 of the hierarchy 1382. Is displayed at the position of the identification number 1373 of the hierarchy 1383, "number" is displayed at the position of the identification number 1374 of the hierarchy 1384, and "number" is displayed as the identification display, and the identification display 1375 of the hierarchy 1382 is displayed. May be displayed at the position of the identification number “1234” at the position of the identification number 1376 of the hierarchy 1383.

  Then, according to the above-mentioned identification displays 1794 and 1799 and the identification display 523 (see FIGS. 61 and 62), the identification displays are indicated by “A”, “B”, “C”, “0”, and “3”. Although the identification information is composed of five identifications, the invention is not limited to this. Various types of identifications may be displayed. Specifically, in the identification display portion 1791, the “manufacturer name” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1793a, the “model name” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1793b, the “manufacturing location” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1793c, “Production date” and “material name of control board” may be displayed. As another specific example of the identification display portion 1791, “QR code (registered trademark)” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1793a, “model name” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1793b, and the identification is displayed on the hierarchy 1793c. "Maker name" may be displayed as the display. Further, in the identification display section 1791, “Production” and “Production” are displayed as identifications on the hierarchy 1793a, “No.” and “No.” are displayed as identifications on the hierarchy 1793b, and “N $” is displayed on the hierarchy 1793c as the identification. ., "1234" may be displayed.

  Further, in the identification display portion 1390 (see FIGS. 61 and 62), the “maker name” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1381, the “model name” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1382, and the hierarchy 1383 is displayed on the hierarchy 1383. The “manufacturing place” and “manufacturing date” may be displayed as the identification display, and the “material name of the control board” may be displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1384. Further, as another specific example of the identification display portion 1390, “QR code (registered trademark)” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1381, “Model name” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1382, and the identification is displayed on the hierarchy 1383. The "manufacturer name" is displayed as the display, and the "control board material name" is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1384. Further, in the identification display portion 1390, “Production” and “Production” are displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1381, “No.” and “No.” are displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1382, and “N $” is displayed on the hierarchy 1383 as the identification display. . Is displayed, and “1234” is displayed as an identification display on the hierarchy 1384, and each identification display is displayed so as not to overlap so as to be visible from the back side of the gaming machine 1. Good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the identification display formed on the identification display section of the board case has been described in detail. However, predetermined identifiable information may be displayed on the control board. For example, in some control means having a control board and a board case, various identifications are displayed at different positions in the thickness direction of the board case. Specifically, “QR code (registered trademark)” is displayed as an identification display at a position closest to the top surface of the board case, and a position closer to the control board than “QR code (registered trademark)” as the identification display. In some cases, “model name” is displayed as an identification display, and “manufacturer name” is displayed at the position closest to the control board or on the control board itself.

[Description of Ninth Embodiment]
Next, a ninth embodiment which is a modification of the above-described seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 66-1 to 66-9. FIG. 66A is a rear view of the board case 1803 in which the control board 501 according to the ninth embodiment is stored. FIG. 66B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the electronic component 595 is viewed from obliquely above via the seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1561. FIG. 66-3 is a (a) plan view and (b) a side view of the transparent socket 1801. 66-4 are cross-sectional views (a) to (d) of the substrate cases 1805 to 1808 in positions corresponding to the line CC in FIG. FIGS. 66-5 are cross-sectional views (a) and (b) of the substrate cases 1809 and 1810 taken along a line corresponding to line CC in FIG. FIG. 66-6 is an explanatory diagram showing the special position display unit 541. FIG. 66-7 is an explanatory diagram of one method of reducing the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560. FIG. 66-8 is a schematic rear view of the case portion 1813 in which the prize ball substrate 1811 is stored. FIG. 66-9 is a schematic rear view of the case portion 1823 in which the effect board 1821 is stored. In the ninth embodiment described below, the same components as those in the seventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in the seventh embodiment, and detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 66-1, the gaming machine 1 of the ninth embodiment mainly includes a control board 501, a ROM 502 mounted on the control board 501, a plurality of electronic boards 595 mounted on the control board 501, It comprises a case section 1803, a seal section 1560 and a seal section 1561 pasted on the case section 1803, a seal section 1562 pasted on the ROM 502, and an identification display section 1390 provided on the case section 1803. The components other than the case portion 1803 have already been described. The case section 1803 has substantially the same contents as the case section 1551 except that the position display section 541 is provided on the seal section 1560.

  Note that, as described above, the information identification section refers to a seal section with an identification display, but a seal section without an identification display does not appear in the description of the ninth embodiment. Therefore, in the description of the ninth embodiment, the seal portion will be referred to as an information identification portion. Specifically, the seal part 1560 may be called a first seal part, and may be called a first information identification part. The seal portion 1561 may be referred to as a second seal portion, and may be referred to as a second information identification portion. The seal unit 1562 may be called a third information identification unit. Further, it is also possible to regard the entire seal portion as an aggregate of a plurality of information identification portions instead of as one information identification portion. For this reason, for example, when a manufacturer name, a model name, and a model number are displayed on the seal portion 1561, there may be a case where three information identification portions are included.

[Mounting part of ROM 502]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66C, the ROM 502 is detachably mounted on the control board 501 via a transparent socket (connector) 1801. FIG. 66-3 (a) is a plan view showing a state where the ROM is mounted on the transparent socket, and FIG. 66-3 (b) is a side view showing a state where the ROM is mounted on the transparent socket. In both figures, the control board 501 is omitted. The transparent socket 1801 has the same function as a normal socket, but has a height and the resin portion of the socket is formed of a transparent material. That is, even inside the socket, it is possible to visually check whether an incorrect wiring or the like is connected to the first signal pin 582 of the ROM 502. Thereby, the occurrence of fraudulent acts such as a so-called hanging substrate can be suppressed. Furthermore, in a state where the transparent socket 1801 is mounted on the control board 501, the pins 1802a of the transparent socket 1801 can be viewed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an incorrect wiring or the like from being connected to the pin 1802a. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

[Position Display Section 541] Cross-sectional view in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to line CC in FIG. 66-1 In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66-4 (d), the position display section 541 has a linear shape. It is a recess. FIG. 66-4 (d) shows a cross section in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to the line CC of FIG. 66-1 in the case portion 1803. As shown in FIG. 66D, the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1803 is slightly larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560 and is a linear concave portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1803. The concave portion is concave toward the rear side. A seal portion 1560 on which a printing portion 1571 is printed is attached to an outer surface 531 of the case portion 1803.

As a modification of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, a position display portion 541 is formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portions 1103 and 1203, and the seal portion 1560 is used as a mark to attach the seal portion 1560 to the outer surface 531. It may be attached (not shown). As another modified example, as shown in FIG. 66-4 (c), the position display section 541 may be a linear convex. FIG. 66-4 (c) shows a cross section in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to the line CC in FIG. 66-1, in the case portion 1807 which is a modification of the case portion 1803. As shown in FIG. 66C, the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1807 is a line-shaped convex portion which is slightly larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560 and is formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1807. , Protruding forward. On the outer surface 531 of the case section 1807, a seal section 1560 on which a printing section 1571 is printed is attached. That is, the position display portions 541 described in the present paragraph and the preceding paragraph are formed by concave and / or convex on the inner surface 532.

  As described above, when the concave or / and convex position display portion is formed on the inner surface 532 and the seal portion 1560 is stuck to the outer surface 531, the position display portion 541 is in contact with the seal portion 1560 regardless of where the seal portion is stuck. Since there is no interference, it does not hinder the application. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector must confirm whether the seal is fraudulent, and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display section 541, the inspector can easily check the printing section 1571 printed on the seal section 1560. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  In the case where a seal portion is attached to the outer surface 531 and the position display portion 541 is provided on the inner surface 532, the position display portion 541 may include an outer edge of the seal portion 1560 attached to the outer surface 531 and / or an inner edge of the seal portion 1560, And / or may be formed to cross the inside and outside of the seal portion 1560. This will be described briefly. 66-6, the position display portion 541a provided on the case portion 1820 is formed on the inner edge of the seal portion 1560, and the portion of the position display portion 541b extending in the left-right direction in the drawing is It is formed to cross the inside and outside. The portion of the position display portion 541 extending in the vertical direction in the figure is on the outer edge of the seal portion 1560, which can also be said to be formed so as to intersect inside and outside.

  As a modification of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66A, a seal portion 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1805, and the position display portion 541 is formed as a linear convex portion on the outer surface 531. It may be provided. FIG. 66-2 (a) shows a cross-section in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 66-2 (a), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1805 is slightly larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560, and is a linear convex portion formed on the outer surface 531. It is protruding. Inside the position display section 541, a seal section 1560 on which a print section 1571 is printed is attached.

  Since the position display portion 541 which is a linear convex portion is provided, for example, when the hand is touched, the position display portion 541 is compared with a case where the seal portion 1560 is attached to the planar case portion. Peeling can be prevented. That is, the seal portion 1560 can be used as a mark for sticking, and after sticking, the peeling of the seal portion 1560 can be prevented. If a part of the seal portion 1560 is peeled off, the inspector must check whether the seal portion 1560 is fraudulent, and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display section 541, since the seal section 1560 is protected, the inspector can easily check the print section 1571 printed on the seal section 1560. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, as another modified example, as shown in FIG. 66B, the seal portion 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1806, and the position display portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531. May be a linear concave portion. FIG. 66-2 (b) shows a cross-section in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. 66-1, in the case portion 1806 which is a modification of the case portion 1803. As shown in FIG. 66B, the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1806 is slightly larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560 and is a linear concave portion formed on the outer surface 531. It is a concave recess. Inside the position display section 541, a seal section 1560 on which a print section 1571 is printed is attached.

  Further, as another modified example, as shown in FIG. 66-5 (a), the seal portion 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1809, and the position display portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531. May also be provided on the inner surface 532. FIG. 66-5 (a) shows a cross section in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. The position indicator 541 on the outer surface 531 protects the seal 1560, and the position indicator 541 on the inner surface 532 allows the seal 1560 to be attached to a more accurate position.

  Further, as another modified example, as shown in FIG. 66-5 (b), the seal portion 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1810, and the position display portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531. May be a convex portion and a concave portion. FIG. 66-5 (b) shows a cross section in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. The seal portion 1560 can be further protected.

  The position display portion 541 is a convex portion and / or a concave portion, but may not be the convex portion and / or the concave portion as long as the position where the seal portion 1560 is attached can be displayed. The position display section 541 is formed at a position avoiding a later-described peeping section 1574. It should be noted that “formed” is not limited to being integrally formed, but also includes being attached by a seal or the like. Further, the position display section 541 may be an L-shaped one that displays the position of a part (corner) of the seal section 1560. The predetermined position on the back of the first surface 531 of the case 1803 does not only refer to the inner surface 532 of the case 1803. If it is assumed that the seal portion 1560 is attached without the substrate 501, the position display portion 541 may be provided on the inner case 40. If it is assumed, the position display section 541 may be provided on the substrate.

[Seal 1560]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66A, the seal portion 1560 on which the print portion 1571 is printed is lower than the light transmittance of the case portion 1803 and the seal portion 1561, and can see through the electronic component 595. It has a predetermined light transmittance. The light transmittance of the seal portion 1560 does not need to be uniform. For example, light transmittance may be reduced by printing something like a pattern. In this case, even if the light transmittance is different in the portions, it is sufficient that the light transmittance is lower than that of the case portion 1803 and the seal portion 1561 as a whole. Also in the present embodiment, a thin line pattern is printed in a hatched portion in the figure to reduce light transmittance. The difference in light transmittance depending on the pattern will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 66-7. In FIG. 66-7 (a), the background of the seal portion 1560 has a wave-like pattern, and in FIG. 66-7 (b), the background of the seal portion 1560a has a lattice shape. Although both companies can see through the electronic component 595, it can be seen that the light transmittance is lower in FIG. 66-7 (a).

Note that the case portion 1803 has the highest predetermined light transmittance, and the seal portion 1561 has a predetermined light transmittance slightly lower than the light transmittance of the case portion 1803. Accordingly, the ROM 502 can be visually recognized by the light transmittance of the case portion 1803, and the electronic component 595 can be visually recognized by the light transmittance of the seal portion 1561 or the seal portion 1560. As a method of making the light transmittance of the seal portion 1561 lower than the light transmittance of the case portion 1803 or the seal portion 1561, the light transmittance of the material of the seal portion 1561 may be reduced, or the light may be transmitted by the printing portion 1571. Permeability may be reduced.

  As compared with the case where the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560 is equal to the light transmittance of the case portion 1551 and the seal portion 1561, forgery of the seal portion 1560 becomes more difficult, and occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Further, when the light transmittance is lowered by the pattern, it is not apparent at a glance that the light transmittance is lowered by the pattern, so that the forgery of the seal portion 1560 becomes more difficult, and the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66-1, a unique area that is not identifiable only when viewed from a predetermined angle is applied to a part where a predetermined character is not attached instead of the colored area 1575 of the seal portion 1560. Information 1804 (K in the present embodiment) is displayed. In the present embodiment, characters are used, but symbols or figures may be used. The continuity of the pattern changes at the boundary between the first area 1814 where the unique information is formed by the pattern and the second area 1815 where the unique information is formed by the character and the pattern. According to this, forgery of the seal portion 1560 becomes more difficult, so that occurrence of fraud can be further suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved. Note that the seal unit 1560 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 66-2, at least one or more different electronic components 595 are attached to a range visible through the seal portion 1561 and a range visible through the seal portion 1560. By sticking a light-transmitting seal portion corresponding to the type of the electronic component 595, fraud can be easily detected and fraud can be made difficult. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  The information described in the seal portion 1561 may include a model name, a model code, external terminal information, a maker name, a QR code (registered trademark), a rated voltage, power consumption, notes, and the like. In addition, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1560 are attached to a position having an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized.

[First display, second display]
In the present embodiment, the case 1803 including the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the electronic component 595 is referred to as control means, and the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 are provided at different predetermined positions in the control means. ing. The first display 1371 and the second display 1372 have different distances from the surface 501a of the control board 501 on the side on which the ROM 502 is mounted until the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 are displayed. Note that the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 do not indicate only the identification display portion 1390, but are provided in the control means as shown in FIG. 66-6, and are provided on the side of the control board 501 on which the ROM is mounted. This is also included if the distance from the surface 501a is different. A surface 501a on the outer case 45 side of the control board 501, its opposite surface, a stamp on the inner case 40, a stamp on the outer case 45, various kinds of seals, and the like are assumed.

  However, the information identification unit and the display do not represent the same information. Note that the seal portion and the information identification portion are not synonymous, and a plurality of information identification portions may exist in one seal portion. For example, if the manufacturer name, model name, and model number are displayed on the seal portion 1561, there are three information identification portions. The relationship between the information identification unit and the display will be described with an example. For example, if the first information identification unit is a manufacturer name, the first display is not the manufacturer name, and thus, for example, the model name displayed on the seal unit. The second display is, for example, the model name displayed on the surface of the substrate 501 on the inner case 40 side. Note that the second information identification unit is, for example, the information on the opening of the seal unit 1560, and the third information identification unit is, for example, the manufacturer name of the seal unit 1562. Since the complicated first display and second display indicating that the distance from the control substrate is different are provided in the control means, forgery of the substrate 501 and the case portion 1803 can be prevented.

[Prizeball substrate 1811]
In the present embodiment, the award ball substrate 1811 and its case portion 1813 are included in the configuration of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 66-8, the prize ball substrate 1811 capable of two-way communication with the control substrate 501 is accommodated in a case portion 1813 having optical transparency. The ROM 1812 is mounted on the prize ball substrate 1811. A plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) different from the ROM 1812 are mounted on the award ball substrate 1811. The ROM 1812 stores data used for controlling a prize ball.

  A seal portion 1816 formed of a light-transmitting material is attached to the case portion 1813. On the seal portion 1816, a plurality of colored regions 1817, which are regions where light transmittance is reduced, are printed. In addition, the seal portion 1816 has a viewing portion 1819 that allows the user to look into the electronic component 595 in a portion where predetermined characters are not provided between the colored regions 1817. The seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1816 are light-transmissive so that the electronic component 595 can be seen through, and the seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1816 have different light transmissivity. In this embodiment, the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560 is lower than that of the seal portion 1816. For example, the seal portion 1560 may have a wave-like pattern as shown in FIG. 66-7 (a), and the seal portion 1816 may have a lattice pattern as shown in FIG. 66-7 (b).

  Since the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560 is different from that of the seal portion 1816, it is difficult to forge the seal portions 1560 and 1816, and it is difficult to replace the case portions 1551 and 1813 with the incorrect substrates 501 and 1811. Can be. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Although not provided in the present embodiment, the case portion 1813 including the prize ball substrate 1811, the ROM 1812, and the electronic component 595 is a prize ball means, and the first and second display portions are provided at different predetermined positions in the prize ball means. A third display and a fourth display may be provided as in (1371, 1372).

[Direction board 1821]
In the present embodiment, the effect substrate 1821 and its case portion 1823 are included in the configuration of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 66-9, an effect board 1821 that can be effect-controlled by one-way communication from the control board 501 or the prize ball board 1811 is housed in a case portion 1823 having a light transmitting property. A ROM 1822 is mounted on the effect board 1821. A plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) different from the ROM 1822 are mounted on the rendering board 1821. The ROM 1822 stores storage contents used for controlling the effect. The control board 501 and the prize ball board 1811 are foot-type boards as shown in FIG. 66-6, and the effect board 1821 is a surface-mount type board. Examples of surface mounting include surface mounting on both sides, surface mounting on one side, surface mounting on the entire surface, and partial surface mounting.

  The case portion 1823 is formed of a light-transmitting material like the seal portion 1560, and is printed with a plurality of colored regions that are regions having reduced light transmittance. Is not affixed to a portion where the character is not attached, which has a peeping portion through which the electronic component 595 can be peeked. A seal portion having a colored region and a peep portion is not attached to the case portion 1823, but is attached only to the case portion 1803. Since the treatment of the seal portion is different in this manner, it is difficult to forge the seal portion 1560 and the case portion 1803, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind and the interest of the player is improved.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the control substrate 501 may include a first region 1900a and a second region 1900b having a mode different from the first region 1900a. Here, the different aspect refers to a difference in which the distinction can be visually recognized. For example, an aspect based on a color such as a different color between the first area 1900a and the second area 1900b or a different shade of color. And a frame-like mode in which the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b are surrounded by a line or a pattern, a mode in which the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b are steps, and the like. One or a combination of can be used. For example, the resist applied to the surface of the control substrate 501 may have a green color in which the second region 1900b is darker or lighter than the first region 1900a. Further, it is preferable that the first area 1900a is set corresponding to a range where the ROM 502 and the electronic component 595 other than the ROM 502 are arranged on the control board 501. On the other hand, the second area 1900b is preferably set corresponding to a range where the control board 501 is not provided with the ROM 502, the electronic components 595 other than the ROM 502, and the board mounted components such as the connectors 771 to 776. , May be set at the edge of the control board 501. In the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b, the above-described color and the like may be different. For example, the arrangement range of the ROM 502 and the arrangement range of the electronic components 595 other than the ROM 502 on the control board 501 may be different. May be different. The first area 1900a and the second area 1900b can be provided on one or both of the mounting surface (rear surface) of the control board 501 and the front surface facing the back surface of the game board unit 12. Further, the first region 1900a may be provided on one of the rear surface and the front surface of the control substrate 501, and the second region 1900b may be provided on the other of the rear surface and the front surface of the control substrate 501.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the control board 501 may be provided with an information identification unit 1902 for displaying specific information in the second area 1900b. Then, the information identification section 1902 may include an identification display 521 including the same information as the identification display 529 described above. As described above, by providing the information identification section 1902 in the second area 1900b having a different mode from the first area 1900a, the information displayed by the information identification section 1902 can be easily viewed. Therefore, the inspector can easily determine whether the control board 501 has been tampered with, and can easily manage the control board 501. Then, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  When the control board 501 is particularly distinguished, a plate body excluding board mounted components such as the mounted electronic components 502 and 595 may be referred to as a “board”, and a board on which the board mounted components are mounted is referred to as a “board”. Control unit ". The first region 1900a and the second region 1900b are preferably provided on the substrate, but regions having different modes may be provided on the board-mounted component.

  The above-described configuration in which the identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 in the thickness direction (front-back direction) in the identification display unit 1390 is different from the configuration in which the identification display 523 provided in the outer case 45 is provided. Instead, the identification information 524 provided on the inner case 40, the identification information 525 provided on the cap 8, the identification information 521 provided on the control board 501, the identification information 522 provided on the ROM 502, and the like are attached to the control unit. It can be applied to the identification display 520. The object to be divided into the layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 is not limited to the characters 1371 to 1376, and may be a display including a plurality of identifiers such as a graphic, a pattern, a code, and a combination of characters. For example, the relationship between the identification displays 520 may be divided into the levels 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 as described above.

  Although the positions of the layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 are described with respect to the object provided with the identification display 523 (in the thickness direction of the identification display unit 1390), if the identification display 523 provided on the outer case 45, If the position is different in the thickness direction of the outer case 45 and the identification mark 524 provided on the inner case 40, the position is different in the thickness direction of the inner case 40 and the identification mark 521 provided on the control board 501 or the board mounted component. , 522, the position is different in the thickness direction of the substrate. Then, it can be said that the identification mark 521 attached to the board and the identification mark 522 attached to the ROM 502 are located at different positions in the thickness direction of the board. It can be said that it is located at a different position in the thickness direction of the substrate from the identification displayed on the front surface. The outer case 45 constituting the surface on which the board-mounted components are mounted is further away from the board than the inner case 40 in order to secure the installation space for the board-mounted components, and the identification mark 523 attached to the outer case 45 is provided. It can be said that the identification mark 524 attached to the inner case 40 is located at a different position in the thickness direction of the substrate.

  The identification display associated with each other is not limited to a mode in which a relationship can be directly recognized by a manufacturer or the like by visual recognition, and can be compared with information held by an administrator or the like, converted by a device held by the administrator, or the like. By doing so, the relationship may be such that the relevance can be grasped. For example, even if the identifications 523 to 525 attached to the board case 3 do not include the identifiers matching the identifications 521 and 522 attached to the control board 501, the information owned by the administrator is referred to. In this case, both identification indicators 520 include common information. In other words, the identification displays associated with each other may include a mode in which the relevance can be directly grasped from the information recognizable by visual recognition, and a mode in which the relevancy cannot be directly grasped from the information recognizable by visual recognition. . In this manner, since the relevance between the identification displays is not apparent at a glance, it is difficult to rewrite by anyone other than the manufacturer or the administrator, and the possibility of fraud can be reduced, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  In the present case, “first display”, “second display”, “third display”, “fourth display”, “first information display”, “second information display”, “first information identification unit”, The “second information identifying unit”, “third information identifying unit”, and “fourth information identifying unit” are not limited to those described in the above embodiment, but may be a sticker, code information or characters printed on a sticker, or a case. It is possible to adopt a general display method and display contents of information relating to a gaming machine on a board or a board case, such as an engraved mark, a model name, a manufacturer name, board management information, and case management information.

(Other embodiments)
(1) In the first embodiment, the logic unit 1530 is provided on the effect control board 320. However, the logic unit 1530 may be provided on a board different from the effect control board 320 and the lamp control board 340, and may be a so-called external board. . This makes it possible to reuse the conventional effect control board 320.

(2) In the first and second embodiments, the logic unit 1530 includes the first XOR 1601, the buffer 1602, the resistor 1603, the capacitor 1604, the second XOR 1605, the polarity inversion element 1606, and the D-FlipFlop 1607. Even if the CLK signal or the DATA signal is delayed due to the difference or noise, etc., the synchronization between the CLK signal and the DATA signal is lost, the correct LED control signal is obtained from the CLK signal and the DATA signal. Had to be able to generate. On the other hand, when there is no signal delay or the like in the transmission line, as shown in FIG. 48, a logic circuit 4630 is formed by one exclusive OR element 4600, and the configuration of the logic unit 1530 is simplified. May be substituted.

(3) In the first to third embodiments, the two-wire driver 1510 is used, but other LED drivers that perform data transmission in a double-wire system, for example, LED drivers of a three-wire system or a parallel communication system May be used.

◇ [Invention A-1]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention A-1, the accessory (347, 348) controlled by a predetermined signal, the first signal (CLK signal (a)) for operating the accessory, and the second signal ( A third signal (signal (g)) is generated from the DATA signal (b)), control means (320, 1530, 4450, 4630) capable of transmitting the third signal, and a third signal from the control means are transmitted. Operating means (1520) for receiving and operating the accessory based on the third signal.

  In the gaming machine 100 according to the first to third embodiments, which is a specific example of the gaming machine of the invention A-1, the control board 320, the logic unit 1530, and the lamp CPU 4450 generate a control signal from the CLK signal and the DATA signal. Then, the one-wire driver 1520 can operate the panel lighting device 347 and the panel driving device 348 based on the control signal. With such a gaming machine 100, the number of components in the transmission path of the control signal can be reduced as compared with the related art, or the space required for the transmission path can be reduced, and the component can be installed on a component that has been difficult to install in the past. Since it is possible to reduce the number of points, the possibility of failure is reduced, leading to a reduction in the interruption time of the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

◇ [Invention A-2]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention A-2, the control means (300) capable of transmitting the first signal (CLK signal (a)) and the second signal (DATA signal (b)) is connected to the control means. And a display device (125) for displaying predetermined game information by an LED. The display device generates a third signal (signal (g)) from the first signal and the second signal from the control means. The gist is that the LED is turned on or off based on the third signal to display predetermined game information.

  In the gaming machine 100 of the above-described first embodiment, which is a specific example of the gaming machine of the invention A-2, the logic unit 1530 of the display unit 125 generates one control signal from the DATA signal and the CLK signal. The linear driver 1520 can control light emission of the display LED based on one control signal generated by the logic unit 1530. In such a gaming machine 100, the one-wire driver 1520 and the two-wire driver 1510 can be mixed in the gaming machine 100.

◆ [Invention B]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention B, the first role (347, 348) controlled by the predetermined signal, the second role (345, 346) controlled by the predetermined signal, and the first signal ( Control means (320a, 4350, 4450) capable of transmitting a CLK signal (a)) and a second signal (DATA signal (b)), and a third signal (320a, 4350, 4450) from the first signal and the second signal from the control means. (G)), converting means (1530, 4450) capable of transmitting the third signal, receiving the third signal from the converting means, and activating the first character based on the third signal. A first actuating means (1520) and a second actuating means (1510) for receiving a first signal and a second signal from the control means and actuating a second accessory based on the first signal and the second signal. And the gist.

  In the gaming machine 100 of the above-described first to third embodiments, which is a specific example of the gaming machine of the present invention B, the sub CPU 320a, the ramp CPUs 4350 and 4450 transmit the CLK signal and the DATA signal, and the logic unit 1530 and the ramp CPU 4450. Generates and transmits a control signal from the CLK signal and the DATA signal, the one-wire driver 1520 activates the panel lighting device 347 and the panel drive device 348 based on the control signal, and the two-wire driver 1510 transmits the CLK signal. The frame lighting device 345 and the frame driving device 346 can be operated based on the and the DATA signal. In such a gaming machine 100, the one-wire driver 1520 and the two-wire driver 1510 can be mixed in the gaming machine 100. For example, conventionally, both the game board unit and the glass frame 150 have two wires. In a gaming machine using the type driver 1510, a new game board unit using the one-wire driver 1520 can be replaced with a conventional game board unit (using the two-wire driver 1510). Becomes Also, it is possible to reduce the number of components in the control signal transmission path compared to the conventional one, or to reduce the space required for the transmission path by installing it on parts that were difficult to install in the past, and to reduce the number of parts. Since it is possible, the possibility of failure is reduced, which leads to a reduction in the interruption time of the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine (100) according to Invention B described above, the conversion means generates a fourth signal (signal (c)) by calculating the first signal and the second signal by a predetermined logical expression. A sixth signal (signal (e)) is generated by calculating from a fifth signal (signal (d)) generated from the signal and the first signal by a predetermined logical formula, and the fourth signal and the sixth signal are generated. The gist is to generate a third signal from the signal.

  In the gaming machine 100 of the above-described first to third embodiments, which is a specific example of the gaming machine of the present invention B, the logic unit 1530 outputs the signal (c) by the exclusive OR of the CLK signal and the DATA signal in the first XOR 1601. The first XOR 1601 generates a signal (e) from the CLK delay signal (d) generated from the CLK signal by the primary delay circuit 1608 and the CLK signal (a) by exclusive OR at the second XOR 1605. The control signal (g) can be generated by the D-FlipFlop 1607 from the generated signal (c) and the signal (e) generated by the second XOR 1605. With such a gaming machine 100, the CLK signal and the DATA signal may be delayed due to a difference in transmission line length, noise, or the like, and the CLK signal and the DATA signal may not be synchronized. Also, a correct LED control signal is generated from the CLK signal and the DATA signal, and various controls can be appropriately performed.

A gaming machine corresponding to the fourth embodiment is:
An accessory controlled by a predetermined signal;
Control means for generating a third signal (LED control signal) from a first signal (DATA signal) and a second signal (CLK signal) for operating the accessory, and transmitting the third signal;
Actuation means for receiving the third signal from the control means and actuating the accessory based on the third signal;
With
The actuation means, when receiving the third signal, is configured to be able to output the third signal to another actuation means connected to a subsequent stage,
The gist is that the control means is configured to be able to transmit the third signal to the operation means connected in multiple stages.

A gaming machine corresponding to the fifth embodiment is:
A game area where game balls flow down,
A first light-emitting unit that has a plurality of first light-emitting bodies, is arranged along the outer periphery of the game area, and can emit light in accordance with a game state;
A second light-emitting unit that has a plurality of second light-emitting bodies, is arranged along the outer periphery of the game area, and can emit light according to a game state;
With
The first light emitting unit includes:
The plurality of first light emitters are arranged so as to be arranged along the outer periphery of the game area in a large number,
The second light emitting unit includes:
The gist is that a plurality of the second light emitters are arranged in a substantially radial direction with respect to the outer periphery of the game area.

A gaming machine corresponding to the sixth embodiment is:
Main control means for controlling the game;
A main storage unit provided in the main control unit and storing information necessary for controlling a game;
Sub-control means for controlling the game based on information from the main control means,
A sub-storage unit that is provided in the sub-control unit and stores information necessary for controlling a game;
A main power supply connected to an external power supply and supplying power to the main control means via main wiring, and supplying power to the sub control means via sub wiring;
When supplying power to the main storage unit at least when power supply from the external power supply to the main power supply is stopped, and when power supply from the external power supply to the main power supply is stopped and through the main wiring When the power supply from the main power supply to the main control means is stopped, a sub-power supply that does not supply power to at least the main storage means,
The gist is to provide.

In a gaming machine corresponding to the sixth embodiment,
The sub power source is
When the power supply from the external power supply to the main power supply is stopped, power is supplied to at least the sub-storage means, and when the power supply from the external power supply to the main power supply is stopped and through the sub-wiring. When the power supply from the main power supply to the sub-control means is stopped, at least the power supply to the sub-storage means is not performed.

◆ [Invention 1]
A gaming machine (gaming machine 1) according to a first aspect of the present invention includes a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a storage section (board) that houses the control board and has light transmittance. Case 1700), a control unit (assembly 2), a seal unit (seal unit 1710) affixed to the storage unit and formed of a light-transmitting material, and provided on the seal unit. A first information display unit (a description area 1570, a code unit 1712, and an information display unit 1713) for displaying information about the control unit, and information on the control unit provided at a position different from the seal unit in the storage unit; And a second information display section (date mark section 1720) for displaying a plurality of colored areas (printing section 171) which are areas where the light transmittance is reduced. , A plurality of regions 1575) and a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, The gist of the invention is to have a visible area (viewing section 1574) in which the control board stored in the storage section can be viewed.

  According to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 as in Invention 1, the opening date described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 The displayed date of manufacture is different information, but has a predetermined chronological relationship. Specifically, the date of opening described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 is always a newer date than the date of manufacture displayed on the date mark portion 1720. Therefore, the inspector confirms the consistency between the date of opening of the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date of manufacture of the date mark portion 1720, thereby preventing an unauthorized act such as an unauthorized exchange of a control board. It can be easily confirmed.

◆ [Invention 2]
A game machine (game machine 1) according to a second aspect of the present invention includes a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a light-transmissive storage section (board) for housing the control board. A case 1700), a control means (assembly 2) having a first seal part (seal part 1710) affixed to the storage part and made of a light-transmitting material, and a first seal part. A first information display unit (a code unit 1712, an information display unit 1713) and a second information display unit (a description area 1570) for displaying information on the control unit, and the first seal unit in the storage unit And a third information display section (code section 1732) provided on the second seal section for displaying information related to the control means. Wherein the first information display unit and the third information display unit include an identification display in a predetermined form readable by a terminal, and the second information display unit reduces the light transmittance. Between the plurality of colored regions (the printing unit 1711 and the plurality of regions 1575), which are the regions that have been made, and a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region. A portion to which a predetermined character is not attached, and a visible area (viewing portion 1574) in which the control board stored in the storage portion can be viewed, and the third information display portion includes: In the thickness direction of the storage section, the distance from the virtual plane where the control board is extended in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the storage section is the distance from the virtual plane to the first information display section. The gist is that they are provided differently .

  According to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1720 and the unsealing-prohibiting seal portion 1730 as in the second aspect, the information displayed on the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 of the seal portion 1720 is opened. It is linked with the information displayed on the prohibition seal part 1730. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm an improper act such as an improper exchange of the control board by confirming the consistency between the information of the seal portion 1720 and the information of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730. Further, the code portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is different from the virtual surface in the thickness direction of the board case 1700 by extending the control substrate 1705 in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction. The distance is different from the distance between the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 of the seal portion 1720. Therefore, the inspector can compare the code portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 with the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 of the seal portion 1720 at the same height and on the same plane. The information in the code portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730, the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720, and the information display portion 1713 can be easily visually recognized, and it is possible to easily confirm an improper act such as an improper control board exchange.

◆ [Invention 3]
A gaming machine (game machine 1) according to a third aspect of the present invention includes a control means (assembly 2) having a control board (control boards 501 and 1705) and a storage section (board cases 1551 and 1700) for storing the control board, and A first information display (character 1371 of the identification display 523) and a second information display (character 1374 of the identification display 523) provided on the means, and in a thickness direction of the storage unit, from a top surface of the storage unit. The point is that the distance to the first information display is different from the distance from the top surface of the storage section to the second information display.

  According to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 in the identification display 523 as in the invention 3, the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 are different levels in the thickness direction of the identification display unit 1390. Therefore, the characters 1371 on the layer 1381 and the characters 1372 on the layer 1382 are formed so that the distance from the top surface of the board case 1700 is different. Since the identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, the identification mark 523 is removed, for example, as compared with a case where the entire identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, since the identification mark 523 is provided at a position where the distance from the top surface in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700 is different, that is, divided and provided in a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification mark 523 is formed only in one layer. It is difficult to remove compared to the case. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed by fraud or the like, the substrate case 1700 will be conspicuously damaged by being polished or shaved. Can be said to be easy and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Furthermore, the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 are separated from each other when viewed from the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the assembly 2 because the characters 1371 and 1372 in the plan view have no overlapping portion and are separated from each other. Both the character 1372 and the character 1372 can be bird's eye view, and it is also possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of an illegal act on the control board 1705 or the like.

◆ [Invention 4]
A gaming machine (game machine 1) according to a fourth aspect of the present invention includes a control means (assembly 2) having a control board (control boards 501, 1705) and a storage section (board cases 1551, 1700) for storing the control board, and A first information display (character 1371 of the identification display 523) and a second information display (character 1374 of the identification display 523) provided on the means, and a predetermined surface of the control substrate in a thickness direction of the control substrate. The point is that the distance from the control information to the first information display is different from the distance from a predetermined surface of the control board to the second information display.

  According to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 in the identification display 523 as in the invention 4, the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 are different levels in the thickness direction of the identification display unit 1390. Therefore, the characters 1371 on the hierarchy 1381 and the characters 1372 on the hierarchy 1382 are formed on a predetermined surface of the control board 1705 (for example, the virtual Surface). Since the identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, the identification mark 523 is removed, for example, as compared with a case where the entire identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, since the identification mark 523 is provided at a position different in distance from a predetermined surface of the control board 1705, that is, divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification mark 523 is formed only in one layer. It is more difficult to remove. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed by fraud or the like, the substrate case 1700 will be conspicuously damaged by being polished or shaved. Can be said to be easy and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Furthermore, the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 are separated from each other when viewed from the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the assembly 2 because the characters 1371 and 1372 in the plan view have no overlapping portion and are separated from each other. Both the character 1372 and the character 1372 can be bird's eye view, and it is also possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of an illegal act on the control board 1705 or the like.

◆ [Invention 5]
A gaming machine (gaming machine 1) according to a fifth aspect of the present invention includes a control board (control boards 501 and 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and the control board for visually recognizing the plurality of electronic components. A storage portion (substrate case 1551, 1700) that is stored and has light transmittance, and a first information display portion (code portions 1572, 1712, information display portions 1573, 1713) attached to the storage portion and displaying predetermined information. ) And a second information display section (a description area 1570), wherein the first information display section is displayed in a first mode including specific information and a second mode different from the first mode, The second information display unit is formed of a material having light transmissivity, and includes a plurality of colored regions (printing units 1571 and 1711, a plurality of regions 1575), which are regions having reduced light transmissivity, and the plurality of Of the colored area Chino be between different second color region and the first color region and the first colored region, the control board viewable area (viewing unit 1574), and summarized in that with.

  In the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1720 as in the fifth aspect, the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1712 and the character string of the information display portion 1713 are linked to each other as described above. And information including the same specific information is displayed in different modes. Therefore, it is difficult for the code part 1712 to be fraudulent, and even if the information in the information display part 1713 has been tampered with, the inspector can check the consistency with the code part 1712 to easily determine the presence or absence of fraud. As well as deterrence of wrongdoing. Further, in the seal portion 1720, since the peeping portion 1574 is formed between the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 and the writing area 1570, the illegal operation is performed on the control board 1705 as described above. Since it is possible to easily confirm whether the information has been tampered with, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraud.

◆ [Invention 6]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 6 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A first light transmissive case part (1803) enclosing the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A seal portion (1560) provided on the case portion and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A plurality of colored areas (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the seal portion is reduced,
The seal portion,
Having a second light transmittance lower than the first light transmittance and capable of visually recognizing the electronic component;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is included in the case portion. The gist of the present invention is to have a peep portion (1574) that allows the electronic component to be peeked through the second light transmittance.

  Since the peep portion is provided, the inspector can check the electronic component via the peep portion. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the electronic component has been tampered with, as compared with the case where the peeping unit is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved. Further, since a plurality of colored areas are provided, for example, the name of the inspector and the date of opening the board case can be described. In addition, the inspector can also write, in the area, the date on which the control board has confirmed whether or not the illegal operation has been performed. Further, since the peeping portion is provided between the regions, the region is more conspicuous than when only the region is provided. For this reason, it becomes easier for the inspector to check the characters and the like written in the area. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved. Further, since the light transmittance of the seal portion is lower than the light transmittance of the case portion, it is difficult to forge the seal portion, and it is possible to make it difficult to perform an illegal act of replacing the entire case portion with an incorrect substrate. Thereby, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 7-1]
A gaming machine (1) according to Invention 7-1 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A light-transmitting case portion (1803) enclosing the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A seal portion (1560) provided on the first surface of the case portion and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A position display section (541) formed at a predetermined position located on the back side of the first surface of the case section and serving as a mark for a position where the seal section is to be mounted;
A plurality of colored areas (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the seal portion is reduced,
The seal portion,
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is included in the case portion. The gist of the present invention is to have a peeping portion (1574) capable of peeking at the electronic component.

  In this case, the manufacturer can position the identification display along the position display section. For this reason, when mass-producing a gaming machine, the manufacturer can attach an identification display to the same position among a plurality of gaming machines. Since the identification display is provided at the same position among a plurality of gaming machines, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, since the position display portion is formed on the inner surface side and the seal portion is attached to the outer surface, no matter where the seal portion is attached, the position display portion does not interfere with the seal portion. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector must confirm whether the seal is fraudulent, and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display section, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display attached to the board case. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 7-2]
In addition, the gaming machine according to Invention 7-2 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A light-transmitting case portion (1803) enclosing the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A seal portion (1560) provided on the first surface of the case portion and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A position display portion (541), which is a protrusion or / and a recess formed on the outer surface of the seal portion on the first surface of the case portion and serves as a mark for a position where the seal portion is to be mounted;
A plurality of colored areas (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the seal portion is reduced,
The seal portion,
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is included in the case portion. The gist of the present invention is to have a peeping portion (1574) capable of peeking at the electronic component.

  In this case, the manufacturer can position the identification display along the position display section. For this reason, when mass-producing a gaming machine, the manufacturer can attach an identification display to the same position among a plurality of gaming machines. Since the identification display is provided at the same position among a plurality of gaming machines, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  In addition, since the outer surface to which the seal portion is attached is provided with a convex portion formed on the outer edge of the seal portion and / or a position display portion which is a concave portion, for example, when a hand touches the substrate case, The peeling of the seal can be prevented as compared with the case where the seal portion is attached to the flat surface. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector must confirm whether the seal is fraudulent, and the inspection takes time. However, such a position display portion protects the seal portion, so that the inspector can easily confirm the identification display attached to the substrate case. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 8]
A gaming machine (1) according to an eighth aspect of the present invention includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A first light-transmitting storage section (1803) for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and inaccessible manner;
A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) and a second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means for displaying specific information;
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include:
At least include an identification that means the same content,
The second information identification unit includes:
Light transmittance is lower than the first light transmittance, and the second light transmittance is formed so that the electronic component can be visually recognized;
A plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions where the light transmittance is lower than the second light transmittance;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is stored in the storage portion. A glance portion (1574) that allows the electronic component to be glanced through the second light transmittance.

  In this case, the examiner can easily confirm that the wrongdoing has not been performed by checking the storage unit displaying the same identification and the storage unit. In addition, even if the storage means is replaced by another storage means due to fraud, for example, the examiner can determine whether or not the identification display provided on the storage means and the storage unit is the same. , It can be easily confirmed that the wrongdoing has taken place. For this reason, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 9-1]
A gaming machine (1) according to Invention 9-1 includes: a board (501) for controlling a game;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A light-transmitting storage part (1803) for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and inaccessible manner;
A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) provided on the first surface of the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A position display unit (541) formed at a predetermined position located on the back side of the first surface of the storage unit and serving as a mark of a position where the second information identification unit is mounted;
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include:
At least include an identification that means the same content,
The second information identification unit includes:
A plurality of colored regions (1575) which are formed of a material having light transmittance, and are regions where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is stored in the storage portion. A gaze portion (1574) that can gaze at the electronic component.

◆ [Invention 9-2]
A gaming machine (1) according to Invention 9-2 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A light-transmitting storage part (1803) for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and inaccessible manner;
A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) provided on the first surface of the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1598) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A position display section (541), which is a protrusion or / and a recess formed on the outer surface of the second information identification section on the first surface of the storage section and serves as a mark for a position where the second information identification section is to be mounted. ) And
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include:
At least include an identification that means the same content,
The second information identification unit includes:
A plurality of colored regions (1575) which are formed of a material having light transmittance, and are regions where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is stored in the storage portion. A gaze portion (1574) that can gaze at the electronic component.

◆ [Invention 10]
A gaming machine (1) according to a tenth aspect includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A light-transmitting case portion (1803) enclosing the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A first seal portion (1561) and a second seal portion (1560), which are provided on the case portion and are formed of a material having a light transmitting property;
The second seal portion includes:
Light transmittance is lower than the first seal portion, and is formed with a predetermined light transmittance so that the electronic component can be visually recognized,
A plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions having light transmittance lower than the predetermined light transmittance;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is included in the case portion. A peeping part (1574) capable of peeping the electronic component by the predetermined light transmittance;
The gist is that it has.

  According to the present invention, since the light transmittance of the second seal portion is lower than the light transmittance of the first seal portion, it is difficult to forge the second seal portion, and the case is replaced with an incorrect substrate. Acts can be difficult. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 11]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 11 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A light-transmitting storage part (1803) for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and inaccessible manner;
A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) and a second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) that are provided in the storage unit and are formed of a material having optical transparency and that display specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means for displaying specific information;
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include:
At least include an identification that means the same content,
The second information identification unit includes:
Light transmittance is lower than the first information identification portion, and is formed with a predetermined light transmittance so that the electronic component can be visually recognized;
A plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions having light transmittance lower than the predetermined light transmittance;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is stored in the storage portion. A peeping part (1574) capable of peeping the electronic component by the predetermined light transmittance;
The gist is that it has.

◆ [Invention 12]
A gaming machine (1) according to a twelfth aspect includes a control unit including a substrate (501) and electronic components (502, 595) provided on the substrate (501), and a plurality of members (511) including the control unit. A case part (3, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) including the electronic component (502, 502) on the substrate (501) in the case part (3, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551). In the thickness direction of the substrate (501), the member (45) constituting the mounting surface side of the substrate (501) serves as an identification mark (523) related to the identification mark (521, 522) attached to the control section. The gist is that a first display (1371) and a second display (1372) having different distances from the substrate (501) are provided.

  In this case, since the identification of the board and the identification of the case are related, if the board is replaced illegally, the identification of the board and the identification of the case may be different. In addition, it becomes easier for the inspector to detect fraudulent activities. Further, the identification display is provided at a position where the distance from the substrate in the thickness direction of the substrate is different, that is, provided in a plurality of layers in the thickness direction so that the identification display is formed only in one layer. It can be harder to remove. With such identification, if the identification is removed by fraud, the case will be noticeably damaged by being polished or shaved. Can be easily found and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 13]
A gaming machine (1) according to Invention 13 includes a control unit including a substrate (501) and electronic components (502, 595) provided on a mounting surface of the substrate (501), and a plurality of members ( 511) including a case unit (3, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551), and the substrate (501) as an identification (520) attached to the control unit and associated with each other. A first display (1371) and a second display (1372) attached so that the distance from the mounting surface in the thickness direction of the substrate is different, and the distance of the substrate (501) from the mounting surface in the thickness direction is different. , Has a third display (1375) attached to be the same as the second display (1372).

  In this case, since the identifications of the control means are related to each other, if the substrate is exchanged improperly, the identification of the substrate and the identification of the case are different from each other. It is easier to find actions. Further, the identification display is provided at a position where the distance from the substrate in the thickness direction of the substrate is different, that is, provided in a plurality of layers in the thickness direction so that the identification display is formed only in one layer. It can be harder to remove. With such identification, if the identification is removed by fraud, the case will be noticeably damaged by being polished or shaved. Can be easily found and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 14]
A gaming machine (1) according to a fourteenth aspect includes a control unit including a substrate (501) and electronic components (502, 595) provided on the substrate (501), and a plurality of members (511) including the control unit. (3, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551), and the case section (3, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) has an identification display attached to the control section. 521, 522) are associated with a first display (1371) and a second display (1372) in which the position of the substrate (501) in the thickness direction is different from the first display (1371). The control unit includes, as the identification display (520) related to the identification display (523) attached to the case unit (3, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551), The gist is that the third display and the fourth display are provided so that the position of the substrate in the thickness direction is different.

  In this case, since the identification of the board and the identification of the case are related, if the board is replaced illegally, the identification of the board and the identification of the case may be different. In addition, it becomes easier for the inspector to detect fraudulent activities. Further, the identification display is provided at a position where the distance from the substrate in the thickness direction of the substrate is different, that is, provided in a plurality of layers in the thickness direction so that the identification display is formed only in one layer. It can be harder to remove. With such identification, if the identification is removed by fraud, the case will be noticeably damaged by being polished or shaved. Can be easily found and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 15]
A gaming machine (1) according to a fifteenth aspect includes: a control board (501) for controlling a game; storage means (502) provided on the control board (501) for storing storage contents used for controlling the game; A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the control board (501), which are different from the storage means (502); and the storage means (502) and the plurality of electronic components (595) are visible and difficult to contact. And a light-transmitting storage section (3,1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) for storing specific information in the storage section (3,1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551). Information identifying section (523,1561) and second information identifying section (1560), and a third information identifying section provided in the storage means (502) for displaying specific information. 522, 1562), and the control substrate (502) includes a first region (1900a) and a second region (1900b) having a mode different from that of the first region (1900a). (1900b) is provided with a fourth information identification unit (1902) for displaying specific information, and the first information identification unit (523,1561) and the third information identification unit (522,1562) , At least the same identification display (529, 1595, 1596) is displayed, the first information identification section is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting portion of the storage means can be visually recognized, and the second information identification section is displayed. , A plurality of colored regions (1575), which are formed of a material having light transmissivity, and have reduced light transmissivity, and a first colored region (1575) of the plurality of colored regions. A portion to which a predetermined character is not attached between the first colored region and a second colored region (1575) different from the first colored region, wherein the plurality of electronic components are stored in the storage portion. (1574).

  In this case, since the first information identification section of the storage section and the third information identification section of the storage section are provided with at least the same identification display, the inspector can confirm that the storage section and the storage section on which the same identification display is displayed. Can be easily confirmed that no wrongdoing has been performed. In addition, since the first information identification unit is attached so that the mounting location of the storage unit has an angle at which the storage unit can be visually recognized, the first information identification unit is attached to the storage unit and the storage unit even when the storage unit is replaced due to fraud. By determining whether or not the identification display is the same, the inspector can easily confirm that the wrongdoing has been performed. Further, since the second information identification section of the storage section is provided with the peeping section, the inspector visually recognizes the plurality of electronic components included in the storage section via the peeping section, and checks the plurality of electronic components. It can be checked whether or not the electronic component has been tampered with. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not a plurality of electronic components included in the storage unit have been tampered with, compared to a gaming machine having no such thing as a peeping unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraud. In such a second information identification unit, since predetermined characters can be described in a plurality of colored regions, the predetermined characters can be written in a transparent portion without a colored region having reduced light transmittance. It is easier for the inspector to confirm the contents of the information in characters than those described. Further, in such a second information identification section, since the transparent peeping section is provided between the plurality of colored areas, compared to a case where only the plurality of colored areas are provided side by side, The colored area becomes conspicuous, and the inspector can easily check the characters and the like written in the colored area. As described above, it is easy for the inspector to find a fraudulent activity and the occurrence of the fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 16]
A gaming machine (gaming machine 1) according to a sixteenth aspect of the present invention provides a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a storage section (board) that houses the control board and has light transmittance. Case 1700), and a sealing portion (seal portion 1710) affixed to the storage portion and formed of a light-transmitting material. The sealing portion includes: A plurality of colored regions (the printing unit 1711, the plurality of regions 1575), which are regions where the light transmittance is reduced, and a second colored region different from the first colored region and the first colored region of the plurality of colored regions. A portion in which predetermined characters are not attached to the colored region, and a visible region (viewing portion 1574) in which the control board stored in the storage portion can be viewed. The means is provided on the control board. Some of the plurality of electronic components (electronic components 798) are mounted so as to be visible through the viewable region, and at least one of the electronic components different from the some electronic components is mounted. The gist is that an electronic component (information display 1750) is mounted so as to be visible without passing through the visible area.

  According to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1710 and the information display 1750 as in the sixteenth aspect, for example, some electronic components such as the information display 1750 can be visually recognized without passing through the viewing portion 1574. It is possible. Therefore, some electronic components that require immediate and easy visual recognition are easy to visually recognize, so that it is easy to confirm fraudulent activities. In addition, some of the electronic components that can be viewed without the peeping portion 1574 are more conspicuous on the control board 1705 than the electronic components that can be viewed through the peeping portion 1574. Unauthorized acts on some possible electronic components can be suppressed. In particular, since the information display 1750 is a member that requires easy visual recognition by opening the game board unit 12 of the gaming machine 1, it is necessary to exhibit the above-described effects.

◆ [Invention 17]
A gaming machine (gaming machine 1) according to a seventeenth aspect of the present invention provides a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a storage section (board) that houses the control board and has light transmittance. A case 1700), a control means (assembly 2) having a seal part (seal part 1710) affixed to the storage part and formed of a light-transmitting material, and mounted on the control board to play a game. And a predetermined information display section (information display 1750) for displaying predetermined value information according to the above. The seal section includes a plurality of colored areas (printing section 1711, A plurality of regions 1575) and a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, The system stored in the storage unit A visible area (viewing portion 1574) in which the board can be visually recognized, wherein the control unit is configured to allow the electronic component (electronic component 798) of the plurality of electronic components on the control board to be visually recognized. The gist is that it is mounted so that it can be visually recognized through an area, and that the predetermined information display unit is mounted so that it can be visually recognized without passing through the visible area.

  According to the gaming machine 1 including the assembly 2 having the seal portion 1710 and the information display 1750 as in the seventeenth aspect, for example, some electronic components such as the information display 1750 are visually recognized without passing through the viewing portion 1574. It is possible. Therefore, some electronic components that require immediate and easy visual recognition are easy to visually recognize, so that it is easy to confirm fraudulent activities. In addition, some of the electronic components that can be viewed without the peeping portion 1574 are more conspicuous on the control board 1705 than the electronic components that can be viewed through the peeping portion 1574. Unauthorized acts on some possible electronic components can be suppressed. In particular, since the information display 1750 is a member that requires easy visual recognition by opening the game board unit 12 of the gaming machine 1, it is necessary to exhibit the above-described effects.

◆ [Invention 18]
A gaming machine (1) according to an eighteenth aspect includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A light-transmitting case portion (1803) enclosing the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
Control means having:
A first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations in the control means;
A seal portion (1560) provided in the control means and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A plurality of colored areas (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the seal portion is reduced,
The first display and the second display are:
The distance from the surface of the substrate on which the storage means is mounted to the first and second displays is different,
The seal portion,
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is included in the case portion. The gist of the present invention is to have a peeping portion (1574) capable of peeking at the electronic component.

  In this case, the first display and the second display are provided at predetermined positions of the control means, and the distances between the storage means mounting surface of the base and the first and second displays are respectively different. It becomes difficult, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts of replacing each control means with a fraudulent base. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  The control unit includes a board, a case unit, a storage unit, and an electronic component. Therefore, for example, the first display may be provided on the substrate and the second display may be provided on the case.

◆ [Invention 19]
A gaming machine (1) according to a nineteenth aspect includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A light-transmitting case portion (1803) enclosing the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
Control means having:
A seal portion (1560) provided in the control means and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A plurality of colored areas (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the seal portion is reduced,
First and second displays (1371, 1372) related to the identification display (1562) provided in the storage means are displayed at different predetermined locations in the control means, and a side of the substrate on which the storage means is mounted. Distance from the surface of the first to the second display is different, respectively,
The seal portion,
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is included in the case portion. The gist of the present invention is to have a peeping portion (1574) capable of peeking at the electronic component.

◆ [Invention 20]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 20 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A light-transmissive storage section (1803) for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and inaccessible manner;
Control means having:
A first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations in the control means;
A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) and a second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means for displaying specific information;
The first display and the second display are:
The distance from the surface of the substrate on which the storage means is mounted to the first and second displays is different,
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include:
At least include an identification that means the same content,
The second information identification unit includes:
A plurality of colored regions (1575) which are formed of a material having light transmittance, and are regions where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is stored in the storage portion. An observing section (1574) capable of observing the electronic component;
The gist is to have.

◆ [Invention 21]
A gaming machine (1) according to Invention 21 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A light-transmitting storage part (1803) for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and inaccessible manner;
Control means having:
A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) and a second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means for displaying specific information;
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include:
At least include an identification that means the same content,
First and second displays (1371, 1372) related to the third information identification unit are displayed at different predetermined locations in the control means, and the first and second displays (1371, 1372) are displayed from the surface of the substrate on which the storage means is mounted. , 2 The distance until the display is displayed is different,
The second information identification unit includes:
A plurality of colored regions (1575) which are formed of a material having light transmittance, and are regions where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is stored in the storage portion. An observing section (1574) capable of observing the electronic component;
The gist is to have.

◆ [Invention 22]
A gaming machine (1) according to a twenty-second aspect includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A light-transmitting storage part (1803) for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and inaccessible manner;
A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) and a second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means for displaying specific information;
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include:
At least include an identification that means the same content,
The second information identification unit includes:
The mounting portion of the storage means is displayed so as to have a visible angle,
The second information identification unit includes:
A plurality of colored regions (1575) which are formed of a material having light transmittance, and are regions where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is stored in the storage portion. A gaze portion (1574) that can gaze at the electronic component.

  In this case, since the mounting position of the storage means can be surely visually recognized, it is possible to suppress improper operation on the control board. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 23]
A gaming machine (1) according to a twenty-third aspect includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A first case portion (1803) having a light transmitting property and enclosing the substrate;
First storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means;
A first seal portion (1560) provided in the first case portion and formed of a material having a light transmitting property;
A plurality of first colored areas (1575) that are printed on the first seal part and are areas where light transmittance in the first seal part is reduced;
A prize ball substrate (1811) capable of two-way communication with the substrate;
A second case portion (1813) having a light transmitting property and including the winning ball substrate;
Second storage means (1812) provided on the winning ball substrate and storing data used for the winning ball;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the winning ball substrate and different from the second storage means;
A second seal portion (1816) provided on the second case portion and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A plurality of second colored regions (1817) that are printed on the second seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the second seal portion is reduced,
The first seal portion includes:
A portion where a predetermined character is not added between the first colored region and a third colored region different from the first colored region, and looks into the electronic component included in the first case portion. A first peeping section (1574) capable of
The second seal portion includes:
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the second colored region and a fourth colored region different from the second colored region, and looks into the electronic component included in the second case portion. A second viewing section (1819) capable of
The first seal portion and the second seal portion include:
The gist is that the electronic component has a light-transmitting property that can be seen through and that the light-transmitting properties of the electronic components are different.

  In this case, since the first seal portion related to the control board and the second seal portion related to the prize ball substrate have different light transmittances, it is difficult to forge the first and second seal portions, and the case portion is invalid. It is possible to make the fraudulent act of replacing with a difficult one. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 24]
A gaming machine (1) according to Invention 24 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A first case portion (1803) having a light transmitting property and enclosing the substrate;
First storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) which are provided on the substrate and are different from the first storage means and mounted through holes in the substrate;
An effect board (1821) capable of one-way communication with the board,
A second case portion (1823) having a light transmitting property and including the effect substrate;
A second storage means (1822) provided on the effect board for storing data used for the effect;
A plurality of electronic components (595) that are provided on the presentation board, are different from the second storage means, and are surface-mounted on the board.
A seal portion (1560) formed of a light-transmitting material is
A plurality of colored areas (1575) which are areas where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, wherein the contained electronic component is A peeping section (1574) capable of peeping,
The gist is that it is attached to the first case portion without being attached to the second case portion.

  In this case, since the treatment of the seal portion is different between the first case portion of the control board and the second case portion of the effect board, it is difficult to forge the first and second case portions and the seal portion, and the case portion is illegal. The fraudulent act of replacing the substrate can be made difficult. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 25]
A gaming machine (1) according to a twenty-fifth aspect includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A first case portion (1803) having a light transmitting property and enclosing the substrate;
First storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means;
Control means having:
A prize ball substrate (1811) capable of two-way communication with the substrate;
A second case portion (1813) having a light transmitting property and including the winning ball substrate;
Second storage means (1812) provided on the winning ball substrate and storing data used for the winning ball;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the winning ball substrate and different from the second storage means;
Prize ball means having
A first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations in the control means;
A first seal portion (1560) provided in the first case portion and formed of a material having a light transmitting property;
A plurality of first colored areas (1575) that are printed on the first seal part and are areas where light transmittance in the first seal part is reduced;
A second seal portion (1816) provided on the second case portion and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A plurality of second colored regions (1817) that are printed on the second seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the second seal portion is reduced,
The first display and the second display are:
The distance from the surface of the substrate on which the first storage means is mounted to the first and second displays is different,
The first seal portion includes:
A portion where a predetermined character is not added between the first colored region and a third colored region different from the first colored region, and looks into the electronic component included in the first case portion. A first peeping section (1574) capable of
The second seal portion includes:
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the second colored region and a fourth colored region different from the second colored region, and looks into the electronic component included in the second case portion. A second viewing section (1819) capable of
The first seal portion and the second seal portion include:
The gist is that the electronic component has a light-transmitting property that can be seen through and that the light-transmitting properties of the electronic components are different.

◆ [Invention 26]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 26 includes: a board (501) for controlling a game;
A first case portion (1803) having a light transmitting property and enclosing the substrate;
First storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means;
Control means having:
A prize ball substrate (1811) capable of two-way communication with the substrate;
A second case portion (1813) having a light transmitting property and including the winning ball substrate;
Second storage means (1812) provided on the winning ball substrate and storing data used for the winning ball;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the winning ball substrate and different from the second storage means;
Prize ball means having
A first seal portion (1560) provided in the first case portion and formed of a material having a light transmitting property;
A plurality of first colored areas (1575) that are printed on the first seal part and are areas where light transmittance in the first seal part is reduced;
A second seal portion (1816) provided on the second case portion and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A plurality of second colored regions (1817) that are printed on the second seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the second seal portion is reduced,
First and second displays (1371, 1372) related to the identification display (1562) provided in the first storage means are displayed at different predetermined places in the control means, and the storage means of the substrate is mounted. Distance from the surface on the side where the first and second displays are displayed is different,
The first seal portion includes:
A portion where a predetermined character is not added between the first colored region and a third colored region different from the first colored region, and looks into the electronic component included in the first case portion. A first peeping section (1574) capable of
The second seal portion includes:
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the second colored region and a fourth colored region different from the second colored region, and looks into the electronic component included in the second case portion. A second viewing section (1819) capable of
The first seal portion and the second seal portion include:
The gist is that the electronic component has a light-transmitting property that can be seen through and that the light-transmitting properties of the electronic components are different.

◆ [Invention 27]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 27 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A first case portion (1803) having a light transmitting property and enclosing the substrate;
First storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) which are provided on the substrate and are different from the first storage means and mounted through holes in the substrate;
Control means having:
An effect board (1821) capable of one-way communication with the board,
A second case portion (1823) having a light transmitting property and including the effect substrate;
A second storage means (1822) provided on the effect board for storing data used for the effect;
A plurality of electronic components (595) that are provided on the presentation board, are different from the second storage means, and are surface-mounted on the presentation board;
Directing means having
A first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations in the control means,
The first display and the second display are:
The distance from the surface of the substrate on which the first storage means is mounted to the first and second displays is different,
A seal portion (1560) formed of a light-transmitting material is
A plurality of colored areas (1575) which are areas where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, wherein the contained electronic component is A peeping section (1574) capable of peeping,
The gist is that it is attached to the first case portion without being attached to the second case portion.

◆ [Invention 28]
A gaming machine (1) according to a twenty-eighth aspect includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A first case portion (1803) having a light transmitting property and enclosing the substrate;
First storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing storage used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) which are provided on the substrate and are different from the first storage means and mounted through holes in the substrate;
Control means having:
An effect board (1821) capable of one-way communication with the board,
A second case portion (1823) having a light transmitting property and including the effect substrate;
A second storage means (1822) provided on the effect board for storing a memory used for the effect;
A plurality of electronic components (595) that are provided on the presentation board, are different from the second storage means, and are surface-mounted on the board;
And a production means having
The first and second displays (1371, 1372) related to the identification display (1562) provided in the first storage means are displayed at different predetermined locations in the control means, and the first storage means of the substrate is The distance from the surface on which it is mounted until the first and second displays are displayed is different,
A seal portion (1560) formed of a light-transmitting material is
A plurality of colored areas (1575) which are areas where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, wherein the contained electronic component is A peeping section (1574) capable of peeping,
The gist is that it is attached to the first case portion without being attached to the second case portion.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the embodiment and the modified examples. However, the above-described embodiment of the present invention is for facilitating understanding of the present invention, and does not limit the present invention. The present invention can be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and the present invention includes equivalents thereof.

  100: gaming machine (gaming machine); 125: display (display means); 300: main control board (control means); 320: effect control board (control means); ... Panel drive device (accessory), 1530... Logic part (control means), 4450... Lamp CPU (control means).

Claims (2)

An accessory controlled by a predetermined signal;
Control means capable of generating a third signal from a first signal and a second signal for operating the accessory and transmitting the third signal;
Actuation means for receiving the third signal from the control means and actuating the accessory based on the third signal;
A gaming machine comprising: Control means capable of transmitting the first signal and the second signal;
A display device that is connected to the control means and displays predetermined game information by an LED;
With
The display device generates a third signal from the first signal and the second signal from the control unit, and emits or turns off the LED based on the third signal to display the predetermined game information. A gaming machine characterized by that: